Digital Telephone System
System Manual
This
is
to the
following
Rev. A and
Rev. A and
Rev. A and later
1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
l-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
SECTION 2 PUBLICATIONS OVERVIEW
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-2
Related Publications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
SECTION 3 HARDWARE SUMMARY
l-3
l-3
Common Equipment Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
SECTION 4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM FEATURES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-l
Abandoned Hold Release
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-l
2-l
Access Denied
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Account Code Button
Account Codes Positive Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface
2-1
2-1
Paging
..2- 1
2-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call-Back
Dialing
2-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
Automatic Hold For Intercom
Automatic Hold -Transfer To Intercom
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
Automatic Hold Transfer To Line
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Pause Insertion
Automatic
2-2
2-2
2-2
Automatic Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Station Relocation
Auxiliary Equipment interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Auxiliary Ringer Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
Background Music
Basic Key Service
Battery Back-Up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Back-Up Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Block Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Call Announce Wiih Handsfree Answerback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Call Costing And SMDA Reports
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-4
Call Forwarding On All Calls
Call Forwarding Personal
. . 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Pickup Directed
Call Pickup Group
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Transfer Screened
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Transfer
Unscreened
2-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling Station Identification On
2-5
2-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class Of Service Programming (From Main Station)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class Of Service Programming (From
Service Program Printout
2-5
2-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Conferencing
Conferencing
2-6
..2- 6
2-6
Unsupervised
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Functional Program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Toll Restriction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9
Delayed Ringing
Departmental Calling Distribution Report
Designated Programmable Buttons
Dial 0 For System Attendant
Direct Department Calling With DCD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Inward Station Dialing
Direct Station Call Hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Station Selection Programmable
2-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distinctive Ringing
2-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb
2-9
2-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb Inhibit
Do Not Disturb Override
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-g
2-9
Dual Intercom
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Line Buttons
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End-To-End
End-To-End Signailing
Exclusive Hold
Intercom
Lines
2-9
2-9
0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold System-Wide Enable/Disable
.2-l
o
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executive/Attendant Override
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
o
External Paging Interface
Feature Inhibit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
o
Flexible Ringing Assignments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-l o
Flexible Ringing Assignments Of PA Port
Flexible Station And Line Class Of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
o
o
Flexible Station Numbering Plan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Button Programmability Of Features
.2-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Answer Inhibit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Idle Line Preference
1
Call Progress Tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
.2-l 1
Intercom Line Timeout
Last Number Redial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Messaging
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Access Restriction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-12
.2-12
Line Answer From Any Station (Night Mode)
Line Groups
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Preselection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line And Line Group Queuing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meet-Me Answer Page
Memory Retention Without Batteries
2
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-12
Message Waiting
Modular Wring And
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music-On-Hold System-Wide Enable/Disable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..2-13
Night
(Of Ringing)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Hook Dialing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
.2-13
3
.2-13
3
.2-13
4
.2-14
Originating Denied
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible
Personalized Ringing Tone
Pooled Line Access
Power Failure Transfer
Prime Line Automatic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy Designated Programmable Button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy Release/Brokerage Service
.2-14
2-14
Private Lines (Access Denied)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Direct Station Selection/Busy Light Field
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-14
.2-14
.2-14
.2-14
.2-14
Programmable Buttons
Pulse/Tone Switchable
Response Messaging
Remote Programming And Administration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ringing Line Preference
Saved Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
.2-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Hook Voice Announce
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
.2-15
secure Off-Hook Voice Announce Button
Secure Off-Hook Voice Announce Groups
Diagnostics
Service Observing
Speakerphone Support
Configuration
Station By Station Privacy
Station Message Detail Accounting
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Monitoring With DSS Call Pickup
.2-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-16
6
6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-16
2-l 6
Station Speed Dial
Station-To-Station Messaging
Subdued Ringing
System Alarm Reports
System Speed Dial
Tandem Attendant
Tap
Tenant Service
Timed Hold
Toll Restriction (0 And 1)
Toll Restriiion (Flexible)
Toll Restriction (Night Mode)
Tone Or Voice Signalling (Intercom)
Transfer/Conference Button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
8
8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unanswered Call Transfer Recall Timing
Voice Announce Blocking
Voice Mail Transfer on Busy
Zone Paging (Via Station Speakers)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-18
8
8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-l
3-l
3-3
Mounting Considerations
Mounting Procedure
AC Power Connection
System Grounding
Line Connections
Station Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-5
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
. . .
,
. . .
,
SECTION 2 OPTION INSTALLATION DETAILS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Key System/Hybrid Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Station Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
7
8
9
Auxiliary Equipment Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Audible And Auxiliary Ringing interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Paging Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Paging Interface Line Port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Device Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Interface
3.23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3 ADD-ON EXPANSION MODULES
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation
3-27
3-29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4 SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE ,
Introduction
Installation
. . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE DIGITALTELEPHONE SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Required
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Procedures
,
. . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND FAILURE
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Condition
..3-3 1
Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistance Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,
Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failure Isolation
,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 7 FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS
CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
4-1
,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-j
SECTION GENERA
L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Programming Overlays
4.2
4-3
4.4
4-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2 CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING
Master Clear
System
System Configuration
Line Configuration
Station Configuration
Direct Inward Station Dialing
Analog Terminal Interface
Toll Restriction Table Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Printer Service
Integrated Call Costing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Message Detail Accounting Reporting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-83
SECTION 3 VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINAL PROGRAMMING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDT Programming Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Programming
Typical PC Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Descriptions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Menu Selections
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table Of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-87
.4-88
.4-89
System COS Menu Selections
Line COS Menu Selections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station COS Menu Selections
Toll Restriction Table Administration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-90
CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1 STATION OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holding Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-7
Answering Calls
Making Calls
Transferring Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conferencing
Messaging
Voice Announce Blocking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Monitoring
Recall/Flash
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Ringing Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb
Answer Inhibit
Switching
5-8
5-8
Background Music
..5- 9
5-9
. . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Call-Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Observing
Executive Override
Speakerphone
1
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Departmental Station Operation
1
Station User Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
SECTION 2 ATTENDANT STATION OPERATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Speed Dial Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Night Transfer (Of Ringing)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music On Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Messaging
7
9
Station Message Detail Accounting (SMDA) Printout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Alarm Reporting
Direct Inward Station Dialing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3 SYSTEM
CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature Code Numbering Plan
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators And Tone Sequences
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display
,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .
CHAPTER6 MAINTENANCE
6 - 1
6-1
6-1
6-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Assistance And Repair Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Location
Wiring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Wall Mounting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Table Of Contents
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-5
Outline Dimensions
Outline Dimensions
Common Equipment
Station Equipment
Figure l-1.
Figure l-2.
Figure 1-3.
Figure 3-l.
Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-l 0.
Figure 3-l 1.
Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-l 4.
Figure 3-l 5.
Figure 3-l 6.
Figure 3-l 7.
Figure 4-l.
Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-3.
Figure 5-l.
6-1.
l-6
l-7
Station Images
3-2
3-4
Mounting Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Connection And System Grounding
Common Equipment, Station And Line Connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Line Connections
Typical Station Connections
Key/Hybrid Configuration
Power Failure Connection
Auxiliary Interface Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-l
7
8
9
Typical Common Audible Interface Wiring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical External Paging Connection
Typical External Paging Connection
Typical Data Device Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-l
Line Port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.3-21
.3-22
Music
Interface
Expansion Module Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.3-26
3-28
Expansion Module Installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Cartridge Installation and Removal
Data Communications Interconnection Diagram
Location Of Keys On Telephone Faceplate
4-49
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Costing Diagram
.4-86
Remote Programming Block Diagram
8
Controls and Indicators
6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Wall Mounting Details
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Overlays
LIST OF TABLES
3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table
Line Connections
3 - 7
3-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3-2.
Table 3-3.
Table
Station Connections
E-Station)
Station Connections (E-Line,
Station Connections
3-9
0
Table 3.4b.
Station Connections
3-23
Table 3-5.
Table 3-6.
Table
Line Connections
408 Expansion Module
408 Expansion Module
Station Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Dialing Codes Chart
Character Codes
6
Table
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Overview
SECTION 2
PUBLICATIONS OVERVIEW
MANUAL SCOPE
This publication contains a technical discussion of the
digital telephone system. Included in this manual is
the following information:
l
Chapter 6,
details are provided in this chapter.
Special maintenance
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Related publications, which contain additional
information applicable to this system, are available
from the manufacturer.
Chapter 1, System Overview: This chapter
provides
a
generalized understanding of the
system, an explanation of the supporting
documentation, and
hardware.
a
summary of the equipment
They are as follows:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Chapter 2, Feature Description: This chapter
provides a detailed discussion of the features
provided by the digital telephone system.
l
01-005 Handling
Components
Electrostatically Sensitive
Chapter 3, Installation: This chapter provides
detailed installation instructions and connection
details.
USER INFORMATION
l
l
l
GCA 70-l 82 Attendant’s Guide
Chapter 4, Programming: This chapter provides
detailed programming instructions for setting the
operating parameters of the system.
GCA 70-l 83 System User’s Guide
GCA 70-l 84 Station User’s Guide
Chapter 5, Operation: This chapter summarizes
operating procedures and provides special tone
and indicator details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Overview
.
SECTION 3
HARDWARE SUMMARY
can be read. As the system clock goes through the
clock cycle, all necessary digital information is passed
between the pieces of equipment sharing the highway.
The digital telephone system consists of an electronic
Key Service Unit (KSU) base unit, usually referred to
as common equipment, optional expansion modules to
extend station and line capacities as required, a
software cardridge containing the operating
The common equipment consists of a base unit, which
provides complete feature support, and optional
expansion modules which provide extended station
and line coverage.
programming, dedicated digital electronic key
telephones, and interconnecting wiring consisting of
small,
or
twisted-pair cable.
The wmmon equipment is contained in a functional,
modem-style metal housing of contemporary design in
keeping with the needs of the modem off ice
The station and line capacity of the base unit and
optional expansion module are per the following chart.
environment. It is engineered to be wall or rack
mounted. The outline dimensions of the common
equipment base units are illustrated in Figure l-l.
MODEL
NO.
STATION
CAPACITY
CO/PBX
CAPACITY
CO408
4
8
C O 8 1
6
1 6
32
8
8
STATION DESCRIPTION
The digital telephone stations employed with the
digital system are electronic,
controlled, devices. They allow not only multiline
pickup but also single key access to features available
Cl 632
1 6
4
CM408
The digital telephone system is full featured, and
supports the digital telephone models.
from the serving CO, PBX, or
switch as
well as the wmmon equipment. The digital telephone
is available in two different images. The features of
the images are as listed below and as detailed in
The digital system is expandable in both line and
station
with the addition of add-on expansion
modules. Refer to Figure 3-14 on page 3-24 for an
illustration of the expansion configurations.
Figure
and in Figure l-3.
The wide-image digital telephone provides the
following features:
COMMON EQUIPMENT
The common equipment base unit is a fully electronic
device. It is essentially a special purpose computer
l
Full modular connection
3 fixed buttons with indicators
. SPKR
l
system acting as
between central off ice (CO), private branch exchange
(PBX), or supplied lines and the proprietary
a
communications controller
l
HOLD
digital telephone stations. The software architecture
of the common equipment provides complete system
support and great flexibility of operation.
.
3 fixed buttons without indicators
The system is fully digital and is
up-gradable
l
TAP
with two usable time slots available for each station.
The digital information passes over time division
multiplexing (TDM) highways. The digital information
is an encoded version of the voice transmission and
.
. MUTE
Programmable buttons with indicators
7-foot, G-conductor line
control signals that are translated into computer
language. The TDM highway can transmit several
signals over a single pair of wires at the same time.
The signals are governed by a system clock. This
clock creates an overall point of reference against
which the TCM information is synchronized and
partitioned into time slots. A time slot is a portion Of
6 position,
or
modular line jack
K-type handset (hearing aid compatible)
Ringer volume control (Off, Low, and High)
Wall mounting capability
time assigned to a particular position of the system
clock. Each time a particular clock
reached, the information associated with that
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
System Overview
available in both monitor and speakerphone
versions.
The image designations refer to the number of
programmable buttons located below the keypad,
including the hold and intercom buttons, as opposed
to the number of programmable buttons located above
the keypad.
l
The LCD speakerphone is available in a 5x14
image, This image provides a priority line grouping
and contains a liquid crystal display which shows
call handling data and other
The
l
The 10x14 image provides a moderate sized line
button matrix along with a moderate sized priority
line button grouping. This image is best suited for
typical work area stations. The 10x14 image is
LCD speakerphone is used as an attendant station
as well as being very applicable for use as an
executive station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Overview
Base
16.50
- 7 . 4 4
26.25
q
2.13
Base Unit
7
16.50
- 7
+
i
0
I
2
27
3%Station Base
Figure 1-l. Outline Dimensions
n
Common Equipment
l - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Overview
l - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Overview
0
l - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Overview
SECTION4
GENERALSPECIFICATIONS
8-LINE,
4-LINE,
8-STATION,
SYSTEM CAPACITY
4
8
8
16
16
32
LINES:
STATIONS:
CONSOLES:
(FUTURE FEATURE)
Non-blocking
Non-blocking
Non-blocking
INTERCOM PATHS:
MAXIMUM SIMULTANEOUS
INTERCOM CONVERSATIONS:
PAGING PORTS
PARK ORBITS
Non-blocking
1
9
Non-blocking
1
9
Non-blocking
1
9
SPEED DIALS
SYSTEM
STATION
99
10
99
10
99
10
AUTODIALS
POWER FAIL CIRCUITS
Unused buttons
1
Unused buttons
1
Unused buttons
1
(Maximum Combinations
At Any One Time)
1
five-way plus 1 three-way
plus 2 SOHVA
2 four-way plus 2 SOHVA
4 five-way plus 5 three-way
plus 1 SOHVA
6 four-way plus 2 three-way
3 four-way plus 9 three-way
16 three-way
1
four-way plus 3 three-way
5 three-way plus 1 SOHVA
POWER REQUIREMENTS
(Fully loaded system)
AC POWER:
90 129 VAC Singlephase all models
2.0 A
150w
200VA
7ow
135w
DIMENSIONS (approximate)
COMMON EQUIPMENT
WIDTH (inches):
HEIGHT(inches):
DEPTH (inches):
WEIGHT (pounds):
16.5
21.3
3.8
16.5
27.1
3.8
16.5
27.6
4.5
30.5
17.5
26
STATIONS
FOOTPRINT (inches):
WEIGHT (pounds):
8.625 X 7.658
2.5
STATION CABLE REQUIREMENTS
TYPE:
P-wire (l-pair) twisted, non-shielded.
1000 feet with 24 gauge wire
MAXIMUM LENGTH:
SWITCHING PRINCIPLE:
Digital, time division multiplexing
Provides non-blocking
switching with stored program control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Overview
ENVIRONMENT
32-122 degrees F (O-50 degrees C)
TEMPERATURE:
90 percent relative, non-condensing
Standard 50-pin male connectors for connection to external
distribution field.
STATION:
Standard, G-conductor mini-jack (USOC 14C)
LINE:
MESSAGE DETAIL
RECORDING PORT
FORMAT:
PARITY:
Serial, pseudo RS-232C
None
DATA BITS:
STOP BITS:
BAUD RATE:
HANDSHAKING:
7
1
or
or
8
2
(programmable)
(programmable)
Programmable in class of service
Xon
Hardware
C T S
CABLE LENGTH:
500 Feet maximum
MUSIC INTERFACE
INPUT LEVEL:
3
peak-to-peak maximum
INPUT IMPEDANCE:
CONNECTOR:
Approximately 500 Ohms
RCA phono jack
PA PORT
OUTPUT LEVEL:
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE:
CONNECTOR:
400 Millivolts peak-to-peak (typical speech)
Approximately 500 Ohms
RCA phono jack
CENTRAL OFFICE LIMITS
LOOP
1900 Ohms maximum
15,000 Ohms minimum
CABLE INSULATION LEAKAGE:
INDUSTRY/REGULATORY
STANDARDS:
FCC Certified, part 15 (Class A)
FCC registered (fully protected)
LISTED by OSHA-accredited, nationally recognized, test laboratory
EIA RS478
Bell publication 48002 guidance
Hearing aid compatible handset
MEMORY
AFTER POWER LOSS:
60 hours minimum
FCC
NUMBER:
KEY SYSTEM:
HYBRID SYSTEM:
1.38
RINGER
NUMBER:
PRODUCT CODES:
ware
SO408
SO816
S1632
7714X 1 OX14 Image Monitor
1 OX14 Image Speakerphone
Image LCD Speakerphone
CO408
CO81 6
Cl 632
CM408
Expansion Module
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Svstem
CHAPTER2
DESCRIPTIONOFSYSTEMFEATURES
transferred. On transferred calls, the transferee is
associated with the call record. On incoming calls, the
last user active on a call is the one that is associated
with the costed call record. The system can be
programmed to place an appropriate message on the
display to remind users of LCD speakerphones to
enter an account code. Account codes may be from
three to eight digits in length as set by class of service
programming. When the user enters an account code,
the system will force the use of the programmed
length, but will verify only the first three digits to
determine validity.
ABANDONED HOLD RELEASE
If an on-hold party hangs up at the
end of a
connection, causing an interruption in the line current,
the system will drop the line from the hold condition
and return it to service. The time interval between
hang-up and line-drop is programmable in line class of
service programming with choices of either 50
350 msec. This feature is usually dependent upon
special arrangements that must be made at the CO
end of the connection. The line select indicator will
turn off to indicate an idle line after a call on that line
hasbeenabandoned.
or
ALL-CALL PAGING
All-call paging allows all stations to receive
ACCESS DENIED
Access to particular lines can be denied at certain
stations in the system through system programming.
A station user cannot select a denied line for use.
This feature is programmable on a per line/per station
basis in station class of service programming.
announcements through the station speaker at once.
All-call paging is also sent to the paging port where it
can be applied to the input of an external paging
amplifier. Origination of announcements must be via
the station handset. Each station can be programmed
to receive and/or originate all-call page. The ability to
receive and originate all-call paging at a station is
enabled by station class of service programming. Also
see the discussion titled: Zone Paging.
ACCOUNT CODE
Station class of service programming can be used to
assign an Account Code button to any programmable
button location at a station as part of the button
mapping procedure. With this Account Code button
available, the user can press it and then dial the
account code without interrupting the call. Only the
user of the Account Code button will hear the DTMF
tones when the code is dialed. The distant on-line
party will not hear the DTMF tones, and the line will
not be placed on hold. The distant on-line party can be
heard while the account code is being dialed.
AREA PAGING INTERFACE
Refer to the discussion titled:
Interface.
ASSIST
This feature allows a station user to program a button
to be used for sending a message to an LCD
speakerphone. Once programmed, the station user
can press the ASSIST button at anytime and then
press a DSS button to sound a tone burst at the called
station and present a preprogrammed message in the
station display. A message can be sent while on a call
without alerting the distant party. This feature is useful
for requesting assistance while engaging on a call. For
ACCOUNT CODES WITH
POSITIVE VERIFICATION
Specific account codes can be assigned by station
users to specific types of calls. The account codes
are used by the system to identify calls by category, or
special grouping, for call recording purposes. All calls
with the same account code will be reported together
by the station message detail accounting feature.
The system may be programmed to verify the user
example,
a
customer service representative could
request assistance from a supervisor while talking to a
problem caller. The supervisor, upon receiving the
tone and noting the display message, could perform
an executive override or service observing action to
join the call or monitor it.
entered account code and sound an
tone if it is
incorrect. The system may be programmed by call
costing and SMDA reporting class of service
programming to permit station users to enter account
codes for incoming calls and/or out going calls if
AUTOMATIC CALLBACK
If a busy tone is encountered after an intercom station
is called, a special code number can be dialed that will
desired. Account codes are entered while on line
either before an out going call is dialed or after the
distant patty on an incoming call has hung up. On out
going calls, the user who enters the account code is
associated with the call record except when the call is
cause the
to automatically ring the calling and
called stations when the called station becomes idle.
2 - l
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Of System Features
No class of service programming is required to enable
this feature.
use of the add-on conference feature. In the
non-private mode, another station with that line
appearance can gain access at the same time
(sometimes known as common line pickup). A line is
specified as private or non-private through the line
class of service programming. Through station class
of service programming, a line can be made
AUTOMATIC DIALING
The system supports up to 22 auto dial positions per
station.
an intercom or line selection. Stored digits include
9-0, and #. A pause is stored at any point where the
buttons can store up to 16 digits plus
non-private at a particular station. Also see the
discussions titled: Conference
Add-On and Privacy
HOLD button is pressed, and a hookflash is stored at
any point where the TAP button is pressed. Automatic
dialing can be used to provide one-button access to
Release.
AUTOMATIC
OF BUSY
system features. No class of service
NUMBER OR UNANSW RED CALL)
A busy number or unanswered call can be
programming is required to enable autodialing. Also
refer to discussions titled: Automatic Pause Insertion,
Station Speed Dial, and Programmable
automatically redialed by activating this feature. Once
automatic redial is activated, the station will select the
line, automatically dial the number, and wait for a
response. It will do this once a minute for
AUTOMATIC HOLD FOR INTERCOM
approximately 10 minutes unless deactivated because
that button or another button is pressed or the handset
is lifted. The feature cycle is timed and does not have
busy detection circuitry. Because of this, if operating
handsfree when the called party answers, the handset
must be taken off-hook to prevent the caller from
being cut off by the timing cycle. Automatic redial is a
designated programmable button position and must be
programmed by the user to be active but no class of
service programming is required.
If the second intercom line is selected while a call is
active on the first intercom line, this feature causes the
first intercom call to be automatically placed on hold.
Station class of service programming is required to
enable this feature.
AUTOMATIC HOLD TRANSFER TO
INTERCOM (ANSWER HOLD)
If the intercom line is selected while an outside line
call is active, this system feature causes the outside
call to be automatically placed on hold. No class of
service programming is required to enable this feature.
AUTOMATIC STATION RELOCATION
With this feature, the system will automatically
recognize a particular station should that station be
relocated to a new station port. When installed at the
AUTOMATIC HOLD TRANSFER TO LINE
This system feature is made available through
programming to selected stations. When enabled,
pressing any line button will cause an active line to
automatically go on hold. This feature allows a user to
move from line to line without having to press the
HOLD button to place any current calls on hold.
Station class of service programming is used to
enable this feature at the desired stations.
new
location, the station will continue to provide
the same class of service parameters and respond
the same extension numbers as it did at the original
station port. This system feature is enabled with
system class of service programming.
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT INTERFACE
A non-key system telephone device or a data device
can be connected to a line ahead of the common
equipment by using the auxiliary equipment interface.
The system can detect an off-hook condition in the
device connected to the auxiliary equipment interface,
AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION
When the system stores a dialed number for later
redial, it automatically stores a pause whenever the
user watts between digits for at least two seconds.
The automatic pause is inserted in the stored number
sequence at the point where the manual pause in
dialing occurred. The length of the pause is fixed at
two seconds by the system.
and
on the status light for that line at the button
system telephones.
does this to indicate that the
line is busy and not available for station use. Auxiliary
equipment interface connections provide connections
to lines 2 and 4. Pressing the line button on a system
station cannot interrupt an external device unless the
line has been programmed to be non-private.
AUTOMATIC PRIVACY
A line can be made private or non-private through
programming. In the private mode, a station has
AUXILIARY RINGER INTERFACE
The auxiliary ringer interface provides “dry-contact”
relay closures which track the ringing pattern
exclusive use of the line during a call.
can access that line unless it is included through the
No other Station
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System Feat!
loss. The switching and charge circuitry are in the
common equipment, while batteries, chassis, and
cable are packaged as a separate option. When
plugged into an active AC power source the common
equipment will constantly charge the attached
batteries. Built-in circuitry automatically switches to
activated when station port 17 rings or when ringing
sent to the paging port.
When programmed for station port
external device is often used to provide loud ringing.
When programmed for paging ringing, an external
7 ringing, an
paging amplifier is usually employed. The system
supplies ringing tones to the paging port along with the
relay closures. The ringing tones can be sent to the
input of an external paging amplifier. The relay
closures can be employed to energize the paging
amplifier while the ringing tone is being sent to it.
battery power when AC power is lost.
batteries at
full charge, a fully loaded system will operate for a
minimum of one hour without AC power.
BLOCK PROGRAMMING
A class of service assigned to a particular station or
line can be assigned to an entire block of stations or
lines with one programming action. This feature
eliminates the need to individually program stations
System class of service programming is used to
choose either the paging port. or station port 17 for the
ringing port relay control. System class of service also
determines the type of ringing sent to the paging
Station class of service programming determines the
and lines
the same class of service. Block
programming class of service can be performed after a
station class of service or line class of service has been
programmed for a particular station or line.
type of ringing sent to station port
Also refer to the
discussions titled: Common Audible Ringer
and External Paging Interface.
CALL ANNOUNCE WITH HANDSFREE
ANSWERBACK
The internal speaker at each station provides
BACKGROUND MUSIC EXTERNAL
MUSIC SOURCE RE6 UIRED)
If an external music source is provided, background
music can be turned on and off at individual stations.
The loudness of the background music is adjusted with
the call monitor speaker volume control, and the
background music automatically turns off during calls.
No class of service programming is required to provide
this feature. Also refer to the discussion titled:
Music Source.
call-announce capability over the intercom link. A
handsfree response to a call-announce call can be
made. This response is transmitted by the microphone
built into the telephone housing..
CALL COSTING AND STATION MESSAGE
DETAIL ACCOUNTING REPORTS
The system provides
estimated costing of all
outside calls. also provides station message detail
BASIC KEY SERVICE
The system provides all of the basic, 1
service features. These features are: selective line
pickup, common line pickup, muftiline pickup, and
hold. No special class of service programming is
required.
EMULATION
accounting (SMDA) printout reports of all costed calls
as well as displayed call costs on LCD speakerphones.
Call costing, in general, provides a means of
establishing costs to be applied to outside calls made
from system telephones. Call costing computes
button
charges for a call after it is completed.
does not
restrict dialing as toll restriction does. Call costs are
based on a two-tier time rate and includes a line
surcharge cost. Allowances can be programmed for
call set-up and minimum call duration. The system
provides several ways of determining call costing
making it is possible to apply reasonable rates for the
entire country.
BATTERY BACK-UP
(CHASSIS, CABLE, AND BATTERIES)
Battery back-up assemblies including chassis, cable,
fuses, and batteries are offered as optional kits
(available from Comdial). The assemblies are
designed to connect directly to the
power source (UPS) interface located on the common
equipment chassis. No user intervention is required
with this feature, and no class of service programming
is required.
The system is arranged to automatically provide a
report whenever the costed call storage reaches 95
percent of
Additionally, programming can be
effected that causes these reports to be printed
automatically at a specific time of day.
BACK-UP INTERFACE
Provision has been made for attaching a Comdial
There are five different SMDA reports which can be
produced:
provided optional battery back-up
to give full
uninterrupted system power in case of an AC power
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System Features
number or station name for the station from which an
intercom call was forwarded.
l
l
Detailed report sorted by stations
Detailed report sorted by account codes
Line summary report
CALL FORWARDING PERSONAL
l
l
Department summary report
A general output of all records
Call forwarding on intercom allows a station user to
designate another station number (or the attendant
station number) to be the recipient of intercom calls
normally directed to that user’s station. For each
intercom call received while call forward is enabled, a
ring reminder (short tone burst) will be sounded at the
forwarding station to remind the user that the calls are
being forwarded. On LCD speakerphones that are
recipients of call forwarding, the display will indicate
the extension number or station name for the station
from which an intercom call was forwarded.
Upon completion of report printing, all records used for
the reports can be deleted. Any call records created
between the time the report printout was started and
completed will not be deleted. If the reports are not
deleted after they are printed, a later command to
delete records will delete all records at that point and
not just the ones that were printed in the previously
generated reports. Programming action can be taken
to always delete the records after they have been
printed. The attendant has the
particular reports to be printed at any time they are
required.
to request
CALL PARK
The call park feature is similar to a manual hold
condition. A call that is parked from a particular
station can be retrieved at any station in the system by
dialing the appropriate access code. (Note: the
retrieving station cannot have access denied to the
line on which the call appears.) Calls are parked and
retrieved within the system through the use of dialing
codes. The system provides nine parking circuits
Account codes can be established to allow system
users to identify calls by category or by any other
desired grouping so that costing by that category or
grouping can be reported. Department numbers can
be defined and stations assigned to different
departments so that call cost reports can be produced
on a department-by-department basis.
(orbits). Call park, when used
the paging
features, allows a system attendant to direct calls to
roving personnel. A call that is left in a parking orbit
for preprogrammed length of time automatically
returns to a timed hold recall condition at the station
which originally parked the call.
Feature programming is provided in call costing and
SMDA Reporting class of service programming.
Stations are assigned to specific SMDA departments
through station class of service programming. The
LCD speakerphone display of costed calls is also
enabled through station class of service programming.
CALL PICKUP DIRECTED
A station user can dial a code, followed by the
extension number of a ringing station, to answer the
ringing call.
.
CALL FORWARDING ON ALL CALLS
This feature allows a station user to designate another
station or the attendant station as the recipient of all
calls normally directed to ring at the user’s station. If
enabled when night transfer of ringing is activated, the
night ringing assignment of the station is also
CALL PICKUP
GROUP
If a call rings to any station in a pre-programmed
group and another user in the group wishes to answer
the call, that user must dial the group pickup code to
answer the call. Four different groups can exist with
any number of stations in a group. Overlap is provided
by allowing stations to be in more than one group thus
enabling those stations to pick up for stations in more
than one group. Stations within the system are placed
in logical answering groups by programming action.
Group stations together using the station class of
forwarded. Calls that are forwarded to
a
recipient
station can be forwarded again from that station to
another station. Thus, two levels of call forwarding on
all calls can occur, first, from station A to station B
and then, from station B to station C. For each
intercom call that is received while calls are forwarded,
a short tone burst will occur at the user’s station as a
reminder that call
is enabled. When a
programmable button is programmed to serve as a
call forward button, the associated LED will turn on
when the button is pressed to indicate that the feature
is enabled. If the call forward button is programmed as
service
programming.
CALL TRANSFER -SCREENED
a second level to a
indication is
button, the LED
reserved for BLF indication. On
Screened call transfer allows outside calls to be
transferred from one station to another, via the
LCD speakerphones that are recipients of call
forwarding, the display will indicate the extension
intercom link, in one of two ways. If both stations have
access to the line, a common line pickup transfer can
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System
66-083
code provided for this purpose. The station user can
program individual stations for speed dial,
direct station selection (DSS) by entering COS with a
code provided for that purpose. Thus, COS
be effected. If the other station does not have access
to the incoming line, transfer can still take place using
the system transfer feature. For a screened transfer,
and
a call is transferred to another station
a
pre-transfer announcement by the transferring patty.
Transferring calls is accomplished with the
button. Also refer to the discussion
programming is arranged with a hierarchical order
from the highest (the installer) to the lowest (the
station user) level
a higher level programmer
titled:
Transfer- Unscreened.
having the ability to do anything a lower level
programmer can do without exiting a current
programming mode. However, only the station user
CALL TRANSFER
UNSCREENED,
can program the speed dial and
telephone.
locations at
An active call can be transferred to another station
without being announced. The transferred call will
camp-on to the other station where it will ring and
await an answer. The call will automatically ring back
to the transferring station after a programmable recall
period. There is no limit as to how many calls can be
camped onto another station. A transferred call will
only ring if the station is idle. The system class of
service programming determines the recall time for an
unanswered transferred call.
All class of service (COS) programming is performed
from station 10 or 12. Any station and console
combination will function in this mode and provide
visual feedback with the LED associated with the
programming button. By employing an LCD
speakerphone, however, the programmer will have the
benefit of display prompts and verifications to simplify
and clarify the programming procedures. Class of
service programming access is as follows:
CALL WAITING TONE
The call waiting tone may be signalled to a busy
station to indicate that another station or the attendant
wants to contact the busy station. A special code is
dialed to activate the tone.
l
l
l
Installer dials:
Administrator dials:
Attendant dials:
User dials:
# 7 4 6
# 2 3 6
# 0
l
Class of service programming can be performed using
CALLING STATION
IDENTIFICATION ON BLF
instructions provided in Chapter 4, Sections
and 4.
If the station number of a calling station has been
programmed into the direct station select/busy lamp
field (DSS/BLF) of a called station, the caller will be
identified by flashing at the corresponding BLF light.
The lights also indicate the status of the DSS
CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING
(VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINAL)
An asynchronous, serial data terminal with an RS-232
interface can be used to effect class of service
programming through menu-driven procedures. VDT
telephones: dark = idle, steady-on
in use, flash
programming provides
a
menu-driven approach to
calling (or ringing when station monitoring is enabled),
and flutter = call back request (if feature is available.
No class of service programming is required for this
feature. Also refer to the discussions titled:
programming as discussed in Chapter 4, Section 5.
CLASS OF SERVICE
PROGRAM PRINTOUT
Programmable
F
and Call Messaging.
Connection terminals are provided to interface an
RS-232 compatible, asynchronous serial data printer
to the system. The connected printer will provide a
printout of class of service and toll restriction records.
The data prlnter service class of service programming
determines the nature and extent of each requested
printout. The system class of service programming
specifies the bit-length and baud rate of the data.
CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING
(FROM MAIN STATION)
Class of service (COS) programming is used by the
installer to configure and assign all system, line,
station, and special purpose operating features. The
installer enters COS programming by dialing an
access code over the intercom line. System
administrators can enter COS programming with
another code to reprogram any system, station, or
special purpose operating feature that may require
COMMON AUDIBLE
RINGER INTERFACE
Connections are available at the wmmon equipment
that provides “dry-contact” relay closures whenever an
incoming line rings. These contact closures track the
ringing pattern and can be used to control an external
change at a later date. Line reprogramming
not available through system administration
programming. The system attendant can reprogram
is
certain system-wide features that require
change by entering COS programming with another
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of System Features
DELAYED RINGING
CONFERENCING ADD-ON
With this feature, a station, operating in a private mode,
can add up to four other stations to an outside call.
Pinging assignments are programmable.
A
station can
be programmed to provide delayed ringing on some
lines while providing immediate ringing on other lines.
Delayed ringing is assigned to certain lines at each
station through station class of service programming.
CONFERENCING MULTILINE
This feature will allow one station to access up to four
outside lines at the same time resulting in a conference
arrangement. Conferencing is established through the
DEPARTMENTAL CALLING
DISTRIBUTION REPORT
The attendant station can request a Departmental
use of the
button.
,
Calling Distribution (DCD) report.
provide a compilation of department call activity. The
statistics that are reported are based on the
department assignments that are active at the time of
the report and are extracted from the SMDR records
collected by the system. For a report to be generated,
a department must exist. All calls that are included in
the DCD report, must meet the following conditions
before they are reported as department calls:
DCD report will
CONFERENCING
After a conference between an internal party and a
maximum of two external parties has been
established, this feature allows the internal party to
drop out of the conference by dialing a special code.
The conference between the two outside parties
continues in an unsupervised condition.
the discussion titled:
UNSUPERVISED
Also refer to
DATA SECURITY
This data security feature will prevent any type of tone
(DTMF, camp-on, barge-in, etc.) from interrupting
call that is active on a port programmed with the
feature. This prevents interference to non-voice
communications from occurring when the port is being
used as a data port (when operating a modem through
They must be incoming calls. Outgoing calls are
not reported in the DCD report.
a
The port number of the line which received the
call must be one that is assigned to a department.
The port number of the station which answered
the call must be assigned to a department.
Use station class of service
an OPX port for, example).
programming to enable a data security port.
l
A DCD report consists of the following columns
of information:
Station Number: The station name or extension
number of the station being reported.
Idle Tlme: The amount of time that the station is
on-hook and available to answer a call.
Dept. Calls: The amount of time spent on
incoming calls that rang into the department and
calls that were transferred to the department.
DEFAULT FUNCTIONAL PROGRAM
At initial power-up of the system, the operating features
are set to a specific group of operating conditions
(defautt conditions). The defautt conditions provide
complete operating system for normal use. can be
left as a system or reprogrammed as
a
desired. Defauft conditions can be reset if desired. A
system can be defaufted by system, line, and station
class of service programming. A master clear will
the entire system and erase all stored
Hold
The amount of time that department
calls spent in an on-hold state at a particular
station.
programmable button information.
Avg. Dept. Calls: The average time per call
(including on-hold time) that a station spent on a
call.
DEFAULT TOLL RESTRICTION
Two toll restriction tables are defaulted with
pre-programmed values and are pre-assigned to all
The time that a station spent in a
lines. The tables need only be assigned to the
by programming action to put them into effect.
defaulted tables can be reprogrammed with different
information using the normal programming procedure.
Assign toll tables to stations using station class Of
service programming. Reprogram toll tables using toll
restriction table configuration class of
stations
wrap-up mode doing such things as follow-up
paperwork. While a station is in a wrap-up mode,
it does not receive department calls. The station
user sets a wrap-up mode by pressing SHIFT
DND and repeats the procedure to clear the
wrap-up mode.
Missed Calls: The total number of calls that are
not answered at a station and that are cycled by
the system to another station for answering
programming.
2 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System
Other Calls: This is a summation of the time
for answering with individual stations having the ability
to be taken out of service as necessary. Calls received
on department lines and calls that are transferred to a
department from within the system are placed in a
queue for servicing. New calls, transferred calls, and
held calls are all assigned a time stamp by the system
so that they will be serviced in the order of their arrival.
spent on outgoing call activity, incoming call
activity on non-department lines, plus all intercom
call activity.
On-Duty Time: The on-duty time includes a
summation of idle time, department call time,
wrap-up time, and other call time.
Off-Duty Time: The time that a station spent in a
do not disturb mode. While in a do-notdisturb
Up to four departments can be formed with up to 16
stations (plus one overflow station) allowed in each
one. A station can be assigned to more than one
department, if desired. Since a station can be
assigned to more than one department, the attendant
station can be added to serve as the overflow station
for all departments if desired. Separate pilot numbers
(extension numbers) can be assigned to each
department to be used for making intercom calls or
doing call transfers to the department.
condition, a station is not available
receive
calls.
station user sets a do-not-disturb
mode by pressing DND and repeats the
procedure to clear the do not disturb mode.
Total number of calls that
went unanswered at
a
department.
Calls Answered After 36 Seconds: Total
number of calls that waited at least 36 seconds
(approximately six rings from the CO) before
being answered.
Calls Handled By Overflow Station: Total
number of calls that were answered and
transferred by the overflow station and then
answered and serviced by another station.
Calls Terminated At Overflow Station: Total
number of calls that were received by the
overflow station and were either answered but
not transferred or were dropped by the caller
before being answered.
The direct department calling feature requires that lines
and stations be assigned to a department. It does not
require that department lines be assigned to to appear
at buttons on department stations. If direct line
appearance of a particular department line to a
particular department station is required, it can be
assigned. If this assignment is made, ensure that
neither direct nor delayed ringing is enabled for that
line at that station.
An incoming call searches for the first station available
to answer a call.
all stations in a department are
Also refer to the discussion titled: Direct Department
busy or are ring no-answer (RNA), the call will go to
the overflow station in that department (if one has been
Calling with Departments Call Distribution (DCD).
programmed).
programmed, the call continues to try the department
stations until is answered or dropped by the caller.
The caller continues to receive tone until the,
call is answered. The overflow station can service the
call or transfer it back to the department using the
department pilot number. When the call is transferred
back to the department by an overflow station, it will
not return to the overflow station until that station is
idle and has no ringing calls either new or transferred.
there is no overflow station
programmable buttons can be assigned to
provide one-button access to a broad range of
features. There are designated buttons that must be
assigned at each station using station class of
programming but the auto rediai button and response
message button are designated programmable
buttons that can assigned by the station user.
instead, the call will
walt for a station to become idle. The caller will receive
music while on hold if the system is equipped. To
provide reassurance to the caller during ringing it is
recommended that a music source be connected to
the system. The call will remain in a held state until it is
answered or until the department transfer recall
at the department and
DIAL 0 FOR SYSTEM Al-l-ENDANT
The system attendant station (station 10) is signalled
whenever the digit 0 is dialed on the intercom line.
DIRECT DEPARTMENT CALLING
WITH DEPARTMENTAL CALL
DISTRIBUTION (DCD)
timeout
has ended. When the recall timeout
Direct department calling has been enhanced
period has ended, the call will return to the transferring
station.
departmental call distribution (DCD) and provides
a
means by which outside lines can be assigned to one
of four different departments. Calls received on
department lines and calls that are transferred to a
department from within the system search for an idle
station in that department. Department calls are
distributed evenly throughout the department stations
Intercom calls that are made to the department will test
the department stations for busy or a RNA
If all
stations are busy, a busy tone is returned to the caller.
Intercom calls will not camp-on at the department but
will go to the overflow station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of System Features
Further, the system camp-on feature cannot be used
to camp-on to a department.
DIRECT INWARD STATION DIALING
(DISD)
The
feature allows an external party to call an
Subsequent calls to a department on a particular line
always try the next station in the department from
whichever station serviced the last call on that line.
This means that if department stations 15 and 16 are
intercom station
attendant. The
which has been specially programmed to allow this
feature. Any line can be programmed to be a
line for both the normal mode of operation and the
night transfer (of ringing) mode of operation.
without assistance by the
call must be received on a line
programmed to answer line
and station 15 services
a call, the next line 1 call will ring at station 16. When
both stations 15 and 16 are programmed to answer
lines 1, 2 and 3, call delivery is on a per line basis: If
station 15 handles and completes calls on line 2 and 3
The number of rings which occurs on a
before is answered is programmable. By setting a
large number of rings, time is allowed for a call to be
serviced in a regular manner by stations that have a
line appearance for the
of rings to 0 disables the line for
to be dedicated for
set
extension number to be dialed is programmable and a
assist station can be programmed to answer
calls that are not completed during this dial time limit.
line
while station 16 is still on line
the next calls on line 2
or 3 goes to station 15 even if station 16 has become
idle.
line. Setting the number
use. If a line is
Since the RNA time of a station is a programmable
feature, department stations can be set to have a short
RNA time to allow a call to search rapidly through a
department for an answer.
use,
is a good practice to
for one ring. The amount of time allowed for an
When an outside or transferred call is ringing at a
department station, the station user can press the
pre-programmed Do Not Disturb (DND) button to
place the station in an off-duty condition. While
off-duty, all outside and transferred calls skip to the
When a
line is called, it rings for a programmed
number of rings. If the call is not answered in a normal
manner by a station with the line appearance during
this time, the system answers it and presents a
dial tone to the caller. The
extension number to be dialed from the calling
telephone. Only one line is serviced at a time;
therefore, an incoming call could ring for more than the
next department station. This
condition
then waits for an
remains set until the DND button is pressed again to
place the station back in service. When the overflow
station is set to DND, all incoming and transferred calls
will return to the department queue.
programmed number of rings if a
serviced when a second
call is being
call is received.
A department station can also be taken out of service
and placed in a wrap-up mode to provide the user time
for doing such things as follow-up paperwork. While a
station is in a wrap-up mode, all outside and
transferred calls skip to the next department station.
The station user sets the wrapup mode by pressing
SHIFT DND and presses these buttons again to clear
the wrap-up mode.
When a valid extension number is dialed, a
confirmation tone is sounded, the system attempts a
transfer, and the called station rings if it is idle. If a
called station does not answer within the transfer recall
timeout period, the call is returned to
the called station has the call
forwarded station rings.
call is placed on hold and camped-on at the busy
station. the camp-cm is not answered within the
transfer recall timeout period, a busy tone is given
followed by
caller to
dial tone. If
feature set, the
a called station is busy, the
It should be noted that the departments formed for use
with this direct department calling feature are different
from those departments used in SMDA reporting.
Assign department transfer recall time (unanswered
call transfer recall time feature) using the system class
dial tone. The system will return the
dial tone two additional times and then
drop the line (a total of three attempts are made).
of service programming. Assign lines for direct
department calling using the line class of service
programming. Assign department stations, access
codes to departments (flexible numbering feature), and
the busy called station is part of a hunt group,
call is muted to an idle station in the hunt
no idle stations are found, the call is
the
group.
busy/RNA timeout (call forward
busy feature) using
at the dialed station.
hunt group is
the station class of service programming. Also refer to
the discussion titled: Departmental
Report.
not followed in the case of a ring-no-answer (RNA).
If an invalid extension number is dialed, an error tone is
If a
sounded before the
dial tone is returned.
mistake in dialing is made, the caller can dial a S for a
new
dial tone. The system will return the caller to
dial tone two additional times and then drop the
line. If extension number dialing is not completed
within the programmed dial time limit, the call is routed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System
to the
assist station if one is programmed;
DO NOT DISTURB INHIBIT
otherwise, the line is dropped. If the assist station is
busy (call will camp-on at the assist station) or
assist station does not answer before the transfer recall
timeout period, the system will return the caller to
dial tone. If extension number dialing is not completed
within the dial time limit this time, the line is dropped.
The system can be programmed to inhibit any station
from entering the DND mode. System class of service
programming is used to program this feature.
the
DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE
Stations can be provided with DND override capability
which will allow them to call a station that is set in the
DND mode. The Executive/Attendant Override feature
must also be active for DND override feature to
function. Station class of service programming is used
to assign this feature. Also refer to the discussions
titled: Do Not Disturb and Executive/Attendant
Override.
It is recommended that a music source be connected
to the system to provide a reassurance to the caller
during a camp-on situation when the
being used.
feature is
DIRECT STATION CALL
HOLD (STATION PARK)
This feature allows a station user to park a call at a
specific station where will be held without ringing. A
DUAL INTERCOM
feature code plus a station extension number can be
dialed over the intercom line to park the call or a
programmable button can be programmed to provide
a “directed hold” to a specific station. The parked call
is picked up by directed station by dialing a feature
code. It can be picked up at any station through the
use of the call pickup feature. No class of service is
required. Also refer to the discussions titled: Call
Directed and Call Park.
This feature provides for two separate intercom lines at
the same station. One intercom line is fixed and is
accessed with the
button. The other intercom
line is programmable and is accessed by a
programmable button selected for that purpose by
class of service programming. Calls are handled on
the intercom lines in much the same manner as
outside calls are handled using the line buttons.
Special considerations are as follows:
Distant party hang-up causes intercom link to drop.
DIRECT STATION SELECTION (DSS)
PROGRAMMABLE
Refer to the discussion titled:
Intercom call to station already busy on intercom
rings in subdued fashion and flashes indicator
associated with other intercom button.
With both intercom lines busy, a third intercom call
in a secure off-hook voice announce (if
enabled) at busy station.
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Pressing a DSS button while on an active intercom
call will drop the distant party unless the automatic.
hold feature is enabled for the intercom line
through class of service programming. The hold
button can be used, however, to place an intercom
call on hold before selecting the other intercom
line for use.
The ringing cadence of an incoming call is the same as
the ringing cadence of
PBX, or
system. The ringing cadence of an intercom call
presents two tone bursts sounded every four seconds.
DO NOT DISTURB
Any action taken on the intercom by a station
being observed via the service observing feature
will cause the observing station to return to an idle
state.
Any station can be set to a do-not-disturb mode (DND)
using the designated DND programmable button and
associated indicator (indicator will light when DND is
active). While in the DND mode, the station will not ring
on any incoming call nor will it accept an intercom call.
A party making an intercom call to a station set in the
The station class of service button mapping procedure
assigns a programmable button to
intercom button.
as the second
do-notdisturb mode hears
a
fast busy tone. The
feature cannot be overridden by the calling party
unless the override feature is enabled. The DND
feature is used with the departmental calling feature to
provide a station wrap-up mode and a station off-duty
DYNAMIC LINE
Through class of service programming, certain idle line
buttons can be arranged to serve as dynamic line
buttons. This feature allows the system to temporarily
assign a line to a station that normally does not have
mode.
Refer to the discussions
Do Not Disturb
Override,
and
Departmental Calling Distribution Report.
the line assigned to
and have that line appear on a
dynamic line button. While the call is appearing on the
dynamic line button (LED on), any normal call handling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of System Features
line class of service programming arranges a line port
for external paging interface.
operations can be performed. Station class of service
programming allows certain buttons to be
programmed as dynamic line buttons
FEATURE INHIBIT
A large array of individual features can be disabled
END-TO-END
ON INTERCOM
system-wide to provide a basic telephone system. A
basic telephone system is useful for installation
environments where a large proportion of the stations
are accessible to unauthorized users thus subject to
tampering or for environments where station users
must be limited as to the variety of features allowed to
them. Features are disabled by system class of
service. Once disabled, they can enabled by turning
on all features at once using the system default
programming.
After an intercom call has been established, the system
can continue to send dialing signals (DTMF tones)
through the intercom path. This feature can be
performed from every station in the system, and is
used by peripherals such as voice mail equipment.
After an outside call has been established, the system
can continue to send dialing signals (DTMF tones)
through the
the distant end for inward call completion (bank by
phone, etc.). conventional, off-hook dialing
feature can be performed from every station in the
system.
network and have them received at
FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENTS
Ringing assignments are programmable on a per
station/per line basis. Pinging can be controlled for
every line that has an appearance at each station.
Delayed ringing is assigned to certain lines at each
station through station class of service programming.
Refer to the paragraph titled: Delayed Ringing.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
Exclusive hold prohibits a held call from being
retrieved by any other station. The exclusive hold
condition also links the held call to the timed hold
recall timeout feature. After timeout, audible and visual
signalling will occur and the exclusive hold condition
will revert to a normal line hold condition.
FLEXIBLE RINGING
ASSIGNMENTS OF PA PORT
The PA port can be programmed for flexible ringing
assignments and zone pages. Any desired lines can
be programmed for direct ring, delay ring, or night
transfer (of ringing) at this port. Paging can be to
EXCLUSIVE HOLD SYSTEM-WIDE
ENABLE/DISABLE
This feature allow systems that do not require
exclusive hold capability to have it turned off
system-wide through programming. System class of
service programming is used to enable or disable
exclusive hold.
programmed zone or to
A speaker can be
connected to the PA port to sound the ringing that is
generated by the system and sent to this port and
paging announcements when they are sent to the
programmed zone. Using such an arrangement, it is
possible for a user to determine that certain lines are
ringing, such as in a night transfer (of ringing) mode,
and go to the nearest telephone and answer the call.
The most common use for this arrangement is as a
night bell eliminating the need for external equipment
as required with the common ringer and auxiliary
ringer interface. The speaker cannot be used for voice
response as the path is one-way only. Use system
class of service programming to assign ringing and
paging to a PA port.
EXECUTIVE/ATTENDANT
OVERRIDE
This feature allows the user of a station, upon
encountering a busy signal at another station, to dial a
code that will override the busy signal of a call, sound
a warning tone, and allow access to the existing
conversation. This feature is enabled through station
class of service programming.
FLEXIBLE STATION AND LINE
CLASS OF SERVICE CONTROL
The extension number of a station and all other
programmable attributes that are initially assigned to a
particular station port and the line, along with all
programmable line attributes that are initially
connected to a particular line port can be re-assigned
different port through programming action. This
feature allows adds, moves, and changes without
EXTERNAL PAGING INTERFACE
A dedicated paging port or a spare line port can be
interfaced
paging amplifier can then be dial-accessed by stations
tones can be dialed through the
line port to provide zone selection provided by the
an external paging amplifier. The
in the system.
external paging amplifier. The dedicated paging
does not support any “talk-back’ capability even if such
a feature is provided by the external equipment. The
to
a
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System
re-locating the station and line wiring. Line and station
class of service programming are used to reassign
stations and lines. Also refer to the discussion titled,
Auxiliary Ringer Interface.
IDLE LINE PREFERENCE
When a station is programmed for idle line preference,
it will automatically be connected to the first assigned
idle line. The system can be programmed on a per
station basis to enable idle line preference. When idle
line preference is enabled, taking the handset off-hook
will automatically connect the station to any assigned
line that is idle and has been arranged for this feature.
The line button will not have to be pressed. If this
FLEXIBLE STATION NUMBERING PLAN
The system supports a flexible station numbering plan
for individual stations. Each station can be
programmed to respond to the dialing of any available
number between 10 and 7999. This feature may be
used to match the calling number of a station located
in a pre-numbered area to that area number. A
combination of two, three, or four digit extension
numbers can be assigned as long as they do not
conflict. For example: If 21 is assigned as an
feature is used in conjunction
prime line
automatic, the user will be given prime line first when
going off-hook. An idle line will be given
line is in use. The station class of service
the prime
programming enables this feature on a per station/per
line basis.
extension number, there can not be any other
extension number assigned that begins with a 21. The
system class of service programming is used to assign
extension numbers to individual station ports.
INTERCOM CALL PROGRESS TONES
Intercom call progress is marked by special tones. A
steady tone is provided for dial tone. Ring-back tone is
one second on and three seconds off. For tone
FULL
signalled intercom calls, a two-tone burst is sounded
every four seconds at a called station and returned to
the caller as ring-back. For a voice signalled intercom
call, a single tone burst is sounded at a called station.
When a called station is busy, a busy signal of one-half
second on and one-half second off is received at the
calling station. A fast busy tone will be supplied when
the called station is in the do not disturb mode. OPX
ports are only supplied with the regular busy tone
since fast busy tones could interfere with the operation
of some accessories that can be connected to this port.
PROGRAMMABILITY OF FEATURES
Most digital communication system features can be
made available at programmable buttons by
programming the specific access codes necessary for
dialing the features. Programmable features include
those that can utilize lamp (on/off) supervision (e.g.,
call park orbits). All feature access codes can be
stored, except for those requiring
button action. Continuous strings of digits can be
stored, including
button presses, up to the
maximum amount of storable digits allowed in an
entry (16).
INTERCOM HUNT GROUP
Station ports can be assigned to intercom hunt
groups. When a station that is assigned to a hunt
group is busy or is a ring-no-answer (RNA), a call to it
HANDSFREE ANSWER INHIBIT
The MUTE button on a station can be used to block all
handsfree
will prevent a station user from monitoring another
station site using the monitoring of the voice
response. This arrangement
will
at the next idle station in the group. A hunt
group can be terminal or circular. A call will route down
a terminal group from the called station until it finds an
idle station or reaches the end of the group. A call will
search around a circular group until it encounters an
idle station or until all stations in the circular group are
searched. The ringing time at any one station is
programmable. Hunt groups are created through
station class of service programming.
announce feature. When the button is pressed, all
handsfree answerback is disabled thus inhibiting any
off-site monitoring. The
indicate that this feature is active.
discussion titled:
(SPKR) light will flash to
refer to the
I HOLD AND I USE INDICATIONS
INTERCOM LINE TIMEOUT
The light associated
a line button provides a
indication of the status of that line. When a station user
has a line in-use or on-hold at a station, the light
indication provided at that station is of a diierent flash
rate than the indication provided at the other stations
Should the intercom line be selected with no dialing or
other action taking place, the intercom will timeout
after ten seconds, and return to an idle state.
in the system. No class of
required.
programming is
LAST NUMBER
Each station is provided with a last number redial
feature. This feature will save 32
of the last
outside number dialed. A newly dialed number will
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of System Features
always automatically replace
a
previously dialed
LINE PRESELECTION
number. Upon command, the system will choose a
Line and redial the saved number. The system will first
choose the prime line if assigned and idle. If it is busy
or unavailable, the system will choose any line
assigned to idle line preference. If they are
unavailable, the system will chose the last line used at
the station. If it is busy, no further choice is made. No
class of service is required. Also refer to the
A line can be manually selected before lifting the
handset (for handsfree dialing) or after the handset is
lifted.
LINE AND LINE GROUP QUEUING
With the line queuing feature, the station user can take
action that will place a station in a queue where it
awaits the availability of a line or line group. The
station is automatically signalled with five tone bursts
discussion titled: Automatic Pause Insertion.
Each station can
when the line is available to it for use.
queue one line at a time.
LCD MESSAGING
Standard and system-supplied custom display
messages can be set by dialing a specific code at any
station. Such messages are to be received and
displayed by any LCD speakerphone that calls the
station which set the message. When a message is
set, the intercom light at the setting station will flash to
indicate that the feature is active.
MANUAL HOLD
A button activated feature at each station will place an
outside line on hold. Pressing the HOLD button holds
the call, provides a distinctive flash rate of the line
button indicator, and allows the user to access other
station features. The holding station or any other
station that has access to the line can retrieve the held
LCD SUPPORT
call.
The system supports the use of digital telephones
having a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). The display is
capable of providing the station user with a visual
presentation of: call cost, call duration, number dialed,
name of called station, name of active feature, date
and time, and programming prompts.
MEET-ME ANSWER PAGE
Any station user can dial a special code number in
response to an all-call or zone page and be connected
to the paging party in a private conversation.
zone paging is provided to the stations through the
station class of service programming.
or
LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION
Refer to the discussion titled: Access Denied.
MEMORY RETENTION WITHOUT
LINE ANSWER FROM ANY
STATION (NIGHT MODE)
The system memory is electronically protected during
AC power failures by an electronic device sometimes
known as a “super cap.” The stored program data will
When the attendant programs the system for nighttime
operation using the night transfer of ringing feature, the
line answer from any station feature is made active.
With this feature, a user can dial an access code over
the intercom line to allow him to answer any ringing
outside line. The line need not be ringing at the user’s
station for this feature to be used.
remain in
for a minimum of
hours provided
that the system has been powered continuously for at
least 30 minutes prior to the power failure or
disconnection. Also, the system clock will continue to
run and keep time for at least 30 minutes after an AC
power failure or disconnection.
LINE GROUPS
Outside lines can be grouped together in up to four
different groups. Each group is accessible through
unique dialing code or automatically selected with the
programmable feature. Grouping can reserve
certain lines for certain clusters of stations as in a
arrangement. The assignment of line
groups frees station buttons normally used for line
selection thus making these buttons available for use
with a feature such as personal
station-to-station messaging. Lines are placed in line
groups the line class of service programming.
MESSAGE
Special feature access codes enable a station user to
control the message waiting
stations in the system. When the message waiting
light is turned on at a station, a call can be
a
light at other
automatically placed to the station that turned it on.
Alternately, one station can be designated by COS
programming as the central message desk and can be
arranged for exclusive message waiting control. The
central message desk can be used to control message
waiting lights and deliver messages to and from all
with
other stations in the system. The
of a station to
originate a message waiting signal is enabled by
programming action. Station class of service
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System
programming provides a station with the ability to
originate a message waiting signal and is used to
create a central message desk.
ON-HOOK DIALING
Every station provides manual and/or automatic dialing
while the station handset is on-hook. An internal
speaker monitors call progress for completion. (The
handset must be taken off-hook to provide the voice
link on non-speakerphone stations.)
MODULAR WIRING AND JACKSR- OR
WIRE SYSTEM
The system can be completely interconnected by
employing industry standard
modular plug/jack combinations. Station wiring is
connectors and
ORIGINATING DENIED
The ability to originate calls on certain lines can be
denied at individual stations through system
programming. The originating denied feature is
programmed on a per station/per line basis.
Originating denied does not prevent a user from
answering a ringing line, retrieving a held call or
receiving a transferred call. Call origination on a line is
denied at a particular station by the station class of
small,
system. A
twisted-pair cable throughout the
twisted-pair cable can be
employed if a spare pair is required for a separate
wiring purpose.
MUSIC INTERFACE EXTERNAL SOURCE
REQ
A jack is provided on the common equipment for the
service
programming.
connection of
a
customer-provided music source.
Also refer to the discussions titled: Background
and Music-On-Hold.
Music
PBWCENTREWCO COMPATIBLE
System features and programmable buttons support
the requirements of most Central Offices, and
systems. Numbers, # ‘s, s’s,
programmable pauses, and flash signals can be made
a part of every stored number for access to host
MUSIC-ON-HOLD
Music is provided to outside lines that are placed on
hold if an external music source is connected to the
system. Refer to the discussion titled: Music
Interface.
system feature codes.
MUSIC-ON-HOLD SYSTEM-WIDE
ENABLE/DISABLE
PERSONALIZED RINGING TONE
Music is provided to outside lines that are placed on
hold if an external music source is connected to the
system. Musicon-hold can be disabled system-wide
This feature allows a station user to choose one of four
diierent ring tones to aid in distinguishing one ringing
station from another.
by attendant action.
Music Interface
Also see discussions titled:
and Music-On-Hold.
POOLED LINE ACCESS
(GROUP LINE ACCESS)
MUTE
Users can dial a special access code instead of
pushing a line button to access one of up to four
different groups of lines. Lines are arranged into
Each station has a MUTE button which, when pressed,
will mute the handset transmitter (or internal
microphone on speakerphones) to prevent the user’s
voice from being heard by the distant party. The
MNTR (SPKR) light flutters to indicate a muted
groups
the line class of service programming.
POWER FAILURE TRANSFER
condition. The button provides push-on/push-off
operation on speakerphones. No class of service is
A power failure line connection is available for
connecting industry-standard telephones such as
a
required. Also refer to the discussion titled:
Answer
Handsfree
model
The power-fail telephone is
automatically connected directly to a certain line
whenever there is an AC power failure. Normal
origination and reception of calls on a power-fail
station is possible during the power failure condition.
The power-fail stations will automatically disconnect as
NIGHT TRANSFER (OF RINGING)
Night transfer (of ringing) is an attendant-controlled
feature that transfers the day ringing program of all
incoming calls to a particular station or stations for
off-hour or special purpose answering. The
transfer mode can only be activated from station 10 or
12. The individual lines at each station that are to be
transferred with this feature are selected by station
soon as power is restored.
PRIME LINE AUTOMATIC
If a station is programmed for prime line automatic, the
designated outside line, intercom line or line group will
be automatically selected when the handset is taken
class of
programming.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of System Features
off hook. Prime line pickup may be pre-empted by
preselecting another line before lifting the handset.
RESPONSE MESSAGING
This feature allows a user to reply in a non-verbal
manner to a voice announce or tone-signalled
intercom call or to a secure off -hook voice announce
call if the intercom caller is using an LCD
the prime line is ringing,
is automatically answered by
lifting the handset. Prime line automatic is assigned
a station through station class of service programming.
speakerphone. A station user can press a
PRIVACY
DESIGNATED
programmable button in response to an intercom call
and send a message to be shown on the display of the
calling station. Response messages are
pre-programmed by the attendant and later stored by
station users at programmable buttons on their
individual stations as need dictates.
PROGRAMMABLE
Stations can be programmed to provide a privacy
button. If a line is private, a user can press the privacy
button to change it into a non-private one. If the line is
non-private, pressing the button will have no effect.
Station class of service programming is used to
program the programmable button function at the
stations.
REMOTE PROGRAMMING
AND ADMINISTRATION
Both remote class of service programming and the
transmission of SMDR data for printing are available
through serial data ports. The system supports X-on
X-off terminal control codes as well as a DTR signal for
handshaking. The system data communications
operates per the popular XMODEM protocol. The
database can be uploaded or downloaded, error free,
from or to a remote computer that is running software
that supports the XMODEM protocol. The two serial
data ports allow VDT programming (either local or
remote) to be conducted through one port at the same
time that the other port is being used to send SMDR
data for printing. VDT programming of the system is
menu driven.
PRIVACY RELEASE/
BROKERAGE SERVICE
See the discussion titled: Privacy
Designated
Programmable button
PRIVATE LINES (ACCESS DENIED)
See the discussion titled: Access Denied.
PROGRAMMABLE DSS/BLF
(DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY
LIGHT FIELD)
A station user can store one-button, direct station
selection (DSS) at any memory button location to
create a DSS memory button. When this button is
pressed, any active outside call is automatically placed
on hold and an intercom call is automatically made to
that previously stored station number. The visual
indicators of the stations programmed at the button
RINGING LINE PREFERENCE
The system can be programmed on a per station basis
to provide ringing line preference on all lines
programmed for ringing at the station.
locations form a busy lamp field
The BLF
When ringing line preference is enabled at a station,
taking the handset off-hook automatically connects the
station to any outside line that is ringing at it. A line
conveys station status to the user. An
can also be programmed as a secondary function at
number
every
is required.
Voice
memory location. No class of
refer to the discussion titled: Tone
(intercom).
button will not have to be pressed.
prime line assigned, the prime line will
a station also has
be
answered first even though it may be the second line
to ring. The of a particular station to answer a
ringing line without line selection is enabled by the
station class of service programming.
PROGRAMMABLE
Refer to the discussions titled:
Programmability
Programmable
and Dedicated Programmable buttons.
SAVED NUMBER
This feature enables a button action to save the first 16
digits of the last number manually dialed from the
buttonpad. The saved number can be redialed at a
later time. The saved number is permanently available
PULSE/TONE SWITCHABLE
The system can be programmed on a per line basis
allow the stations to switch from pulse to DTMF type
dialing as needed. Aftemately, the system can be
programmed to only allow tone dialing. The line class
of service programming sets the dialing mode required
for later use until it is replaced with a new number.
SECURE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
for a particular line.
the secure off-hook voice announce (SOHVA)
feature, a secure announcement can be made from
one station to another station that is off-hook and busy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System
on a call. A station being operated in a handsfree
mode cannot receive a SOHVA SOHVA, the
blocked.
The
no SOHVA
does
announcement is delivered and responded to in a
secure manner that prevents the distant party from
hearing either the announcement or the response. The
announcement is preceded with a tone alert and is
delivered to the handset receiver of the telephone. The
announcing caller receives a tone alerting them that
they are making a SOHVA call. Response to the
announcement can be verbal or non-verbal. Verbal
response is effected by pressing and holding the
button and speaking into the handset.
It.
SOHVA
to
are
configurations:
by the system into the
following
Non-verbal response is effected by pressing a
pre-programmed programmable button to send
message to be shown on the display of the
a
announcing station (if it is an LCD speakerphone). The
announcing station is automatically disconnected after
the message is delivered to
(and displayed if an LCD
speakerphone). Stations that have the voice announce
blocking feature turned on cannot receive a SOHVA
Station class of service programming is used to
disable the SOHVA feature at a station port if desired.
SECURE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
ORIGINATE
This feature allows a telephone user to program a
button at their station that must be pressed to enable
the delivery of a SOHVA call. This SOHVA enabled
button allows the caller, after hearing a busy signal, to
decide whether the called party should be interrupted
in a SOHVA manner. If they should, the button can be
pressed and a SOHVA call completed. This button,
along with SOHVA groups allows system users greater
control of the callers that are allowed to make a
SOHVA call and of the situations that SOHVA calls are
allowed. Refer to the discussions titled: Secure
Off-Hook Voice Announce, and Secure Off-Hook Voice
Announce Groups.
Example 1: Allow station port 10 to originate SOHVA
messages to all stations in the system and allow those
stations the ability to originate SOHVA messages to
each other but not to station port 10. Assign group 1
to station port 10 and assign group 2 to all other
station ports.
SECURE OFF-HOOK VOICE
ANNOUNCE (SOHVA) GROUPS
The ability of a station port to originate an&or receive
SOHVA calls can be arranged by class of service
programming with the assignment of SOHVA calling
groups to station ports. This means that certain station
ports can be arranged together for SOHVA calling
between one another while other station ports in the
system are excluded from this group.
Example 2: Allow station ports
and 15 to receive
and originate SOHVA calls between each other but
deny both receive and originate capability from any
other system stations. Assign group 8 to both station
14 and station port 15. Do not assign group 8 to
any other station port
be
.
Eight different SOHVA groups are provided by the
system. They are fixed into a variety of SOHVA
receive/originate configurations. One SOHVA group
can be assigned to each station port to allow or to
deny SOHVA receive and/or originate capability to
By properly assigning SOHVA groups to station
The SOHVA groups are assigned in station class of
service programming. refer to the discussions
Off-Hook Voice Announce, and Secure
Off Hook Voice Announce Button.
SOHVA paths between stations can be opened or
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Features
STATION
RECORDING
SELF DIAGNOSTICS
Each station can execute a self test when so enabled.
This test verifies processor, indicator, and tone
functions.
SMDR feature generates a call record for printing
as soon as the record is collected by the system. The
call record is presented at an W-232 level as ASCII
transmit data in an
available for that purpose.
format at the data port
Refer to the discussion
SERVICE OBSERVING
Service observing allows a third party to enter an
in-progress call in an unannounced muted mode to
monitor the conversation. There will be no warning
tones sounded when the call entry is made. This
feature is useful in allowing a supervisor to monitor the
performance of an employee during a phone
conversation with a client. For a station to provide the
service observing feature, the executive override
feature is automatically enabled when the service
observing feature is enabled. Service Observing can
be blocked by class of service programming on a
station basis. Use station class of service programming
to give a station service observing (and executive
override) or block this feature.
Call Costing and SMDA Reporting.
STATION MONITORING WITH
DSS CALL PICKUP
The busy lamp field (BLF) of a station can provide
visual indication of the idle, busy, and ringing status of
monitored stations. Audible indication of direct and
delayed ringing can also be provided if visual ring
indication is enabled.
A one-button pickup of a ringing call at a
station can be made at the monitoring station by
pressing the direct station selection (DSS) button
associated with the ringing station.
The flashing BLF lights associated with visual ring
indication can be enabled or disabled on a
SPEAKERPHONE SUPPORT
The optional speakerphone provides handsfree
operation of all features, except voice-signalled
intercom calls. The handset must be lifted for this
purpose.
system-wide basis. When enabled, the audible
indication of ringing can then be enabled on a
station-by-station basis. Enable or disable visual ring
indication on a system-wide basis with system class of
service programming. Enable or disable audible ring
indication on a station-by-station basis with station
class of service programing.
SQUARE/NON-SQUARE
CONFIGURATION
A system can be programmed to be square or
non-square as desired. In a square system, the line 1
STATION SPEED DIAL
Each station can be programmed to provide 10 speed
dial numbers at the buttonpad buttons. Station speed
buttons of all telephone stations select line
the line 2
buttons select line 2, etc. In a non-square system,
each line select button at every station may be
assigned individually to select any line. Button
mapping for line appearance can be performed on
each station using the station class of service
programming.
dial numbers can be up to
include line or intercom selection, numbers,
digits in length and can
S,
pauses, and flash signals. A pause is stored each time
the HOLD button is pressed, and a flash signal is
stored each time the TAP button is pressed.
STATION BY STATION PRIVACY
See the discussion titled:
STATION-TO-STATION MESSAGING
If a station has a
station, a callback message indication can be left at
that station with the appearance. By dialing
appearance at another
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL
ACCOUNTING (SMDA)
See the discussion titled: Call Costing and SMDA
a special code, the BLF light at the called station that is
assigned to the calling station can be activated. This
indicates that a callback is requested. The light is
Reporting.
automatically turned off
made.
a successful callback is
If a station number is not programmed for a
appearance at another station, attempting to place a
call back message will cause the central message desk
station to ring.
there is no central message desk
assigned, no action will occur.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description Of System
TIMED HOLD RECALL
SUBDUED RINGING
After a call has been on hold for a programmed length
of time the system will recall the station that placed
the call on hold. The system class of service
When a station is busy on a call and another call
comes to the same station, the ringing of the second
call will automatically be subdued to a lower volume.
programming sets the timed hold recall time period.
SYSTEM ALARM REPORTS
TOLL RESTRICTION (0 AND 1)
The system can be arranged to report alarm and status
conditions to a particular station or stations that have
been enabled to receive them. The station must be an
LCD speakerphone for this feature to be used. When
enabled to receive alarms, the station user can take
appropriate action to cause the alarm codes to be
presented on the LCD display. System and station
class of service programming are used to enable this
feature.
See the discussion titled:
Restriction (flexible).
TOLL RESTRICTION (FLEXIBLE)
System toll call restriction can be configured to
prohibit some or all stations from calling a wide range
of number combinations. The restricted numbers are
specified on up to 16 tables. The system assigns
several broad-range values to two of these tables, and
assigns the tables to all lines as a default condition.
The default tables need only to be enabled on a per
station basis to activate the default toll restriction.
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
Ninety-nine system-wide speed dial numbers are
provided.
system speed dial numbers can be up
In general, toll restriction works as follows:
to thirty-two digits in length, and can include numbers,
The programmable tables of restricted numbers
contain up to four entries with each entry containing
up to 16 digits.
‘s, S’s, pauses, and flash signals. System speed dial
numbers are programmed at station 10 or 12 for use at
every station in the system. No class of service is
required.
Each table of restricted numbers can be programmed
to be an “allow” table or a “deny” table with entries in
an “allow” table overriding entries in a “deny” table.
This arrangement allows exceptions to toll restriction
to be enabled. For example, the dialing of
TANDEM ATTENDANT
When the tandem attendant feature is enabled, a recall
from an unanswered call transfer or a timed hold recall
will ring at the normal attendant station (station 10) that
set the transfer or hold condition, and also at the
tandem attendant station (station 12). System class of
service programming is used to enable the tandem
attendant mode.
numbers can be allowed even though
the dialing of all 1-xxx-xxx-xxxx numbers is denied.
A “match anything” symbol (# ) can be stored to
represent any digit from 0 to 9. The programmed toll
restriction tables are individually assigned to each
appropriate station and line. When an outside call is
dialed, the system examines the dialed number and
TAP
When host system custom calling features are
available via a hookflash signal, the system can be
programmed so that the TAP (RECALL) button will
generate a “flash” signal when it is pressed. When
custom calling features are not available, the TAP
(RECALL) button functions as a positive disconnect, or
dial tone, recall button. These two features are
makes a comparison between
and the toll restriction
tables. Any tables assigned to BOTH the station being
used and the selected line determine the restrictions to
be imposed.
Dialing a restricted number on a restricted line from a
restricted station will cause the line to be automatically
disconnected from the station.
mutually exclusive. The
time is
Toll table class of service programming is used to
create the tables of restricted numbers.
assigned through system class of service
programming.
TOLL RESTRICTION (NIGHT MODE)
TENANT SERVICE
Toll restriction tables that will only take effect when the
system is in the night transfer (of ringing) mode, can
be assigned to any or all stations in the system. These
toll tables replace any that may be assigned to the
station during normal, or day mode, operation. For
example: A station that has no other toll restriction
table assigned to it can be programmed to receive a
toll restriction table which will restrict everything but
One telephone system can be used for multiple
tenants at a location by having flexible line appearance
at each station. Button mapping for line appearance
can be performed on each station using the station
class of
titled:
programming.
Square/Non-Square
Refer to the discussion
Configuration.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of System Features
programming determines the recall time for an
unanswered call transfer. Refer to the discussion
titled: Tandem
local calls and will only take effect when the system is
placed in the night transfer (of ringing) mode.
Therefore, even though toll calls can be made
station during daytime operation, no toll calls can be
this
made from it when the attendant programs the system
for nighttime operation using the night transfer of
ringing feature.
VOICE ANNOUNCE BLOCKING
This feature allows station users to block voice
announced intercom signalling by pressing
a
programmable button programmed for that purpose.
The programmable button used to block voice
signalling is enabled by station class of service
programming.
NOTE This night mode
restriction table
assignment should nor be confused
night transfer (of ringing) feature.
Toll restriction class of service programming is used to
program the night mode toll restriction tables and to
assign them to the stations.
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER ON BUSY
When using ExecuMail, a busy station may desire to
be alerted if ExecuMail is attempting to transfer a call
to that station. This feature allows a station to be
programmed for this option. With this option, when
TONE OR VOICE
(INTERCOM)
Intercom calls can be tone signalled or voice signalled
ExecuMail tries to transfer a call to a station that is
busy on a call (outside or intercom call) and the station
has an available intercom line (stations can be
programmed to have a second intercom), the intercom
will ring subdued. The call can be picked up by
pressing the button of the ringing intercom line. In
general, attendants will probably desire this feature so
they can handle multiple calls, while other station users
may prefer to have a message taken when they are
already busy on a call.
as desired.
Programming determines the signalling method
employed as the primary method when an intercom
call is made. The
user action at the station. Intercom call progress is
marked by special tone signals.
paragraph titled:
system class of service programming determines
which type of intercom signalling is first option
signalling for the system.
method is available through
refer to the
Progress Tones. The
ZONE PAGING VIA STATION
SPEA ERS)
Zone paging allows groups of stations to receive
announcements through the station speakers. The
programming can enable zone paging in up to four
different zones. Zone paging can also be received at
TRANSFER/CONFERENCE
A fixed button is provided that gives quick, easy
transferring and conferencing.
UNANSWERED CALL
TRANSFER RECALL TIMING
the paging
of an external paging amplifier. The
where it can be connected to the input
of each
A transferred call that is unanswered after a
station to originate and/or receive a page and the
arrangement of the paging into different zones are
by station class of service programming.
pre-programmed length of time will return to the
station that transferred ft. The system will return the
call to both attendant stations when the tandem
attendant feature is enabled. When LCD
Zone paging through the paging
is enabled by
system class of
discussion titled:
Speakers)
programming. Also refer to the
Paging (Via Station
speakerphones are employed, the display will show
the station number or name as well as the line number
that is being recalled. The system class of service
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
CHAPTER3
INSTALLATION
SECTION 1
STANDARD INSTALLATION DETAILS
MOUNTING CONSIDERATIONS
l
l
Connecting tool
connector block.
for fastening wires to a type-66
The common equipment cabinet should be attached
vertically to any sturdy, flat surface. It may be
vertically rack-mounted if desired.
Crimping tool
for 623-type modular plugs
MOUNTING PROCEDURE
The cabinet must be located within six feet of a
proper electrical outlet. The system requires a
1. Unpack and carefully inspect all equipment for
shipping damage. Notify the shipper immediately
of any damages found. Verify that the packages
contain all parts and accessories needed for proper
installation and operation.
dedicated
15 AMP circuit, with a third-wire
ground, supplied to a standard electrical outlet
(NEMA
The distance between the common equipment and
the TELCO/PBX jacks must be 25 feet or less as
per FCC requirements. A nominal distance of 7 feet
is recommended.
2. If a backboard is required at the mounting location,
attach it securely to provide a stable mounting
surface for the equipment.
Refer to Flgure
for the locating dimensions
3.
required for the three mounting screws, and mark
their locations on the mounting surface.
The mounting location must be secure and dry and
have adequate ventilation. The temperature range
of the location must be within 32-l 22 degrees F
(O-50 degrees C), and the relative humidity must be
less than 90 percent non-condensing.
4. Drill holes in the mounting surface of a proper size
to accommodate the hardware being used. If
necessary, prepare these holes with inserts,
anchors or other attachment devices as dictated by
the type of mounting surface.
If the mounting surface is damp or if it is concrete or
masonry material, a backboard must be attached to
the mounting surface to be used for common
equipment mounting. Suitable mounting
5. Insert the two top screws into the mounting surface
and tighten them to within approximately
of the surface.
backboards are available commercially or can be
6. Hang the cabinet on the top screws using the
mounting holes located on the rear of the cabinet.
Note that these holes are elongated with an
enlargement at one end. This feature allows the
cabinet to snap down on the screws to secure the
mounting when the cabinet is hung on them.
constructed out of
plywood cut to size.
SPECIAL MOUNTING CONSIDERATION
When the battery back-up is to be included as part of
the installation, the optional external batteries, cable
assembly, the common equipment, and the wiring
connections must be located in
a
dedicated equipment
7. Insert a third screw through the mounting tab
located on the lower edge of the cabinet and into
the mounting surface, and tighten it into place.
room (as defined in the National Electric Code
published by The National Fire Protection Association,
MA, 02269).
Place the individual telephone stations as desired
and in keeping with accepted industry and off ice
standards. A telephone station can be wall
mounted if necessary as they are desk/wall
reversible. Refer to Chapter 6, Maintenance, for
8.
TOOLS AND HARDWARE
Fasteners
wood screws
x 1 -inch round
head), toggle bolts, or -wall anchors
instructions in preparing
station for wall mounting.
a
desk/wall reversible
Screwdriver-to match fasteners
Electric drill
if prepared holes are required
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- -
66-083
Base
&Line, 1 &Station
Base
Base Unit
Figure
Dimensions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
The minimum battery backup time for a fully
configured system can be calculated. The formula for
doing this is:
AC POWER CONNECTION
Employ a dedicated
15 AMP circuit, with a
a standard electrical
third-wire ground, supplied to
outlet (NEMA
for the AC power connection. A
C
= 1 +
(N)]
power connection is illustrated in Figure 3-2 shown
below.
T
K
Back-up time in hours
l
A plug-in power line surge protector should be
= Constant
installed between the power cord and the AC outlet.
0.9 for CO408 with or without a CM408 module
0.8 for CO816 with or without CM408 modules
0.8 for Cl 632 with or without CM408 modules
l
l
Do not connect the AC power cord until the
installation has been checked.
= Ampere-hour capacity of battery (BBU02 = 15)
= total number of stations
To apply AC power, connect the power cord to the
electrical outlet.
N
Example:
BATTERY BACK-UP
Assume that a Cl 632 system plus two CM408
modules are installed along with a BBU02 battery
assembly to provide back-up power.
The common equipment provides an interface
connector for the connection of an optional external
battery assembly. This assembly is available
separately as a kit.
(0.8)
= 1 +
(15)
12
= 5.8
=
l
During AC operation, the common equipment
provides re-charging current to maintain the voltage
potential of the external battery assembly at an
operational level. The charging circuit may not
provide an adequate charge if an installed battery
assembly has a current rating of greater than 40
ampere-hours.
Be sure that the AC power cord Is
connected to the electrical outlet before
connecting the external battery assembly
to the common equipment interface
connector.
ensures that internal
protection circuitry Is operating to prevent
damage that could result from Improper
connection.
NOTE: The optional BBUO2 external battery assembly
l
The optional Comdial model BBU02 external battery
assembly provides a minimum of one hour of
operation should the AC power to the system be
interrupted. The BBU02 assembly has a 15
requires
re-charge
hours to completely
full potential after has been
completely discharged and, in some cases,
when initially installed.
ampere-hour current rating.
The BBU02 external battery assembly may include
batteries from either of the following suppliers:
Model PS-12150 from Power-Sonic Corporation,
SYSTEM GROUNDING
The common equipment cabinet has internal
Redwood City CA, 94032.
secondary surge protection on all line ports. In order
for this protection to be effective, the cabinet MUST be
connected to a reliable earth ground such as a metal
Model
from GS PORTALAC, City Of
Industry CA, 91748
cold water pipe or a building frame ground.
The
grounding wire must be of or insulated, solid
copper and separate from the three-wire AC line cord.
A ground stud is located on the common equipment
cabinet for this purpose. System grounding is
illustrated in Figure 3-2,
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUSE :
4-LINE, 8-STATION BASE UNIT: I AMP 250V SLOW BLOW FUSE
8-LINE,
BASE UNIT:
250V SLOW BLOW FUSE
250V SLOW BLOW FUSE
BASE UNIT:
PLUG IN
LI NE SURGE PROTECTOR
TYPICAL)
DEDICATED I
I
INTERFACE
ICONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
TYPICAL-EARTH GROUND
(METAL COLD WATER PIPE,
BUILDING
NOTE
:
W H E N E X P A N S I O N
A R E I N S T A L L E D O N
BASE UNIT ATTACHM OAD U L EOS R l l2 INSULATED
COPPER
BETWEEN THE
S EE NOTE.
ON THE EXPANSION MODULES AND THE
TERMINAL ON THE BASE UNIT
Figure 3-2. AC Power Connection And
Groundina
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
LINE CONNECTIONS
Connections between the common equipment and the
stations are typically via type connector
which are cable connected to the common
male connector. The connector block is, in
turn, wired to modular jacks which the stations
connect to through the line cord. The maximum
distance allowed from the common equipment to the
The line terminations for the common equipment
cabinet are standard modular plug/jack connections.
Each modular’jack provides termination for two lines.
Modular line jacks 1 and 2 also provide termination for
an auxiliary pair in addition to the two outside lines.
The outside line termination can be a type
connector block or individual 6-position modular jacks.
The line cord that is routed between the outside line
termination and the common equipment termination
should be twisted-pair wiring. Table 3-1 shows the
line connection details for all three of the common
equipment base units. Figure 3-4 illustrates typical
line connections.
stations is 1000 feet using
cable.
gauge, twisted-pair
If spare conductors exist in the cables that are run
between the connector blocks and the station
jacks, it is a good practice to connect them to earth
ground. as a preventative measure against radio
frequency and/or AC interference.
Transient voltage spikes, if induced onto CO or
lines, can travel through the cable and into
the common equipment. The telephone company
offers basic protection against this condition but it is
usually designed to protect the central off ice circuits.
While it will also provide some protection to the
Only one station should be connected to a station port.
Do not bridge two stations to a single modular jack.
Table 3-2 shows the station connection details.
Figure 3-5 illustrates typical station connections.
The extension number and all other programmable
attributes of a station that are initially assigned to a
particular port can be re-assigned to a different port by
programming action. This feature allows adds, moves
and changes to be made without re-locating the
station wiring. Refer to the automatic station relocation
programming procedure found on page 4-10 and the
station-to-station programming procedure found on
page 4-50.
common equipment, it should not be relied upon for
total protection. To help ensure that external
overvoltage surges do not damage the system, it is
recommended that gas discharge tubes, or similar
primary protection devices, be installed and properly
grounded on all lines.
The outside line that is initially connected to a
particular line port along with all programmed
attributes, can be reassigned to a different port by
programming action. This feature allows adds, moves,
and changes to be made without relocating the line
wiring. Refer to Chapter 4, page 4-19 for line to line
NOTE: The
station
assignment
can nor be relocated.
Add-on expansion modules are available to expand
station capacity. Refer to Section 3 for complete
details.
port
re-assignment.
Add-on expansion modules are available to expand
line capacity. Refer to Section 3 for complete details.
CABLE CLIPS
STATION CONNECTIONS
The system supports the operation of the following
digital station types:
Each cabinet-mounted
male connector is
equipped with a retaining clip. This clip is designed to
secure the mated connection once it is made. The clip
does this by snapping into a slot on the cable-mounted
connector when it is pressed together with the
cabinet-mounted connector. This retaining clip must
be pulled back slightly to unsnap it before the
connectors can be separated.
l
l
Comdial Digital Multiline Telephone
Comdial Digital LCD Speakerphone
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Table
Line Connectlons
LJNE JACK PIN NO
.
Auxlllaty 1 (Llne 2)
Llne 2
Llne
L i n e
Llne
1
1
2
RING
RING
4
8
Unlt
Unlt
Unlt
16 Sta.
Auxlllaty 1 (Line 2) RING
Auxiliary 2 (Line 4) TIP
16 Lhr, 32 Sta
A TIP
Line 3 TIP
Line 5 TIP
Line 5 RING
Line 6 RING
No Connection
No Connection
Llne 8
16 Sta.
32 Sta.
16
Unlt
Line 7 TIP
Line 7 RING
Llne 8 RING
No Connectlon
No
Line 10
Llne 9
Llne 9 RING
Llne 10 RING
No Connectlon
No Connection
Llne 12
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
6
32 Sta. Base Unlt
I
I
6
2
Llne
3
4
Line 11 RING
Llne 12 RING
No Connectlon
No Connectlon
Llne 14
Line 13 TIP
Llne 13 RING
Llne 14 RING
No Connection
No Connectlon
Llne 16
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Table 3-2. J-l Statlon Connections
&Station Base Unit)
SPARE
PORTS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Table 3-3.
(&Line,
Station
Base Unit)
STA.
STA
WIRE COLOR
3
I
I
I
I
I
B
BLUE-BLACK
BLACK-ORANGE
11
37
PATH
SIGNAL
RED
GREEN
12
23
21
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
.
.
.
.
Table 34a.
Staion Connections
Base Unit)
N
SIGNAL I GREEN
12
I
. .
4
29
4
7
8
SIGNAL GREEN
PATH
.
.
. . . . .
14
15
16
17
18
5
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
i
i
1 3 1
Ill
.
EN
133
SIGNAL
PATH
SIGNAL
GREEN
RED
GREEN
RED-BROWN
BROWN-RED
RED-SLATE
SLATE-RED
9
9
18
19
10
35
t
I
I
36
i
i
SIGNAL
GREEN
BLACK-BLUE
- - - -
I
BLUE-BLACK
t
--
_
i
S I G N A L
i
GREEN
i
25
I
SPARE
PORTS
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
don
Table
Statlon
Base Unit)
CONNECTIONS
27
28
29
30
31
32
ID
:n
3 4
35
37
39
40
41
I
SIGNAL GREEN
I ---
I
SPARE
PORTS
3-l 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-STATION BASE UNIT
BASE UNIT
STATIONS 1 O-25
RS-232 DATA PO
RS-232 DATA PO
LINE JACKS 9 &
LINE JACKS 7
LINE JACKS 5
LINE JACKS 3
6
6
LINE JACKS 1
AUX LINE 2
2
STATION
COMMON AUDIBLE,
4, AUX LINE 4
DATA PORT, STATION
POWER FAIL STATION,
HYBRID STRAP
AUDIBLE,
JACKS 1 & 2, AUX LINE
2
LINE JACKS
AUX LINE 4
POWER FAIL STATION
MUSIC INTERFACE
PAGING PORT
LINE JACKS 11
LINE JACKS 13
14
16
LINE JACKS 15
BATTERY
BACK-UP
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
L
SYSTEM STATUS LED
PAGING PORT
MUSIC INTERFACE
GROUNDING
TERMINAL
- I L -
STRAP
8 -LINE,
BASE UNIT
LINE JACKS 1
LINE JACKS 3
2. AUX LINE 2
4, AUX LINE 4
STATION 10
25, COMMON AUDIBLE,
DATA PORT, STATION 17 AUDIBLE,
POWER FAIL STATION.
HYBRID STRAP
LINE JACKS 5
LINE JACKS 7
6
8
CONNECTOR
GROUNDING
TERMINAL
PAGING PORT
MUSIC INTERFACE
Figure 3-3. Common Equlpment, Statlon And Llne Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TO
TO
4
2
TIP I
TIP 2
TIP 3
TIP 4
Figure 3-4. Typical Llne Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installat.
66-083
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
SECTION 2
OPTION INSTALLATION DETAILS
Number on the equipment label. The appropriate
KEY SYSTEM/HYBRID CONFIGURATION
registration number must be reported to the telephone
company at the time of connection along with other
FCC mandated information. Operationally, the hybrid
configuration enables a PBX feature that may incur a
higher monthly tariff to the telephone company. This
feature allows dial access to (automatic selection of)
outgoing lines. The specific system feature that is
enabled by the multifunction (hybrid) configuration is:
The systern can be configured to operate as either a
key system or as a hybrid system. Configuration is by
way of a wire strap connected as detailed below and
illustrated in Figure 3-6.
The common equipment is shipped from the factory as
a key system (KF).
convert operation over to the
hybrid (MF) system, add the strap.
The
and MF designations are equipment type
l
Line Group (Including Dial Access)
categories as stipulated in FCC rules and regulations,
Pan 68, and appear as part of the FCC Registration
ADD CONFIGURATION
STRAP FOR HYBRID
OPERATION
-I-
- - - -
2 5
5 0
- - - -
C
- - - -
- - ‘ I - -
- - - -
g
- - - -
- - I - -
26
BARR IER STRIP
CLIP TERMINALS
BASE UNIT1
CONNECTOR BLOCK
8-S TATION BAS E UNIT
AND 8-LINE,
BASE UNIT1
Figure 3-6. Key/Hybrid Configuration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
industry standard, single-line telephone, such as a
Comdial model can be connected to a power
failure pair and used to provide communications
POWER FAILURE STATION
CONNECTIONS
The system provides a tip and ring pair connected to
line 1 as an emergency power failure circuit. This
circuit is active during a commercial AC power failure
if an external battery assembly is not installed to
provide battery back-up power to the system. An
capability until the AC power to the system is restored.
The power failure pair is located as follows and as
detailed in Figure 3-7 below.
POWER FAILURE TERMINALS ON
STATION CONNECTOR BLOCK
8-STATION AND 8-LINE,
BASE
POWER FAILURE JACK
BASE
25
TYPICAL INDUSTRY STANDARD
NON-ELECTRIC TELEPHONE
FAILURE INTERFACE)
26
I
4 6 - - l - -
4 7 - - l - -
4 6 - - l - -
- - l - -
5 0 - - l - -
CLIP TERMINALS
l
, - - - - - - - - - e - - - - B - - - d
’
Figure 3-7. Power Faliure Connection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
NOTE: When the auxiliary interface feature is being
employed, the line to line port reassignment as
discussed on pages 3-5 and 19 works as
EQUIPMENT INTERFACE
An industry standard non-electronic telephone device
or a data device can be connected on a line ahead of
the common equipment. The system can detect an
off-hook condition in the connected device and
described except in regard to line 2 and line 4.
Line 2 can only be reassigned to line port 4
and line 4 can only be reassigned to line port 2
on
the line
light at the telephones to indicate that
(given in Section 1) and
the line is busy. Table
l
Connection is across tip and ring of lines 2 and 4.
The auxiliary interface connections are provided at
terminals 1 and 6 of common equipment line jacks 1
and 2.
Figure 3-8 below detail the auxiliary interface
connections.
3-8.
Interface Connections
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Selected Ports
COMMON AUDIBLE AND AUXILIARY
RINGINGINTERFACE
The station 17 audible terminals provide
a
dry-contact relay
Relay closure dry-contact points are available for controlling
external audible equipment. These contact closures track
closure whenever ringing is sent to
a
programmable
destination. Class of service programming is used to
either the paging port or station port 17 as the
ringing destination. Refer to page 4-13 for details.
the pattern of the ringing
.
The contacts are closed during
the ringing period and are open during the silent period.
typical common audible connection is illustrated on
3-9 below.
A
Figure
When programmed for station port 17 ringing,
device is often used to provide loud ringing similar to the
common audible arrangement shown in Figure
an external
Do not exceed a 1 amp at 24 volts (0.5 amp at 48
volts) load on these control terminals. If the
When programmed forpaging port ringing, an external
paging amplifier is employed to amplify and broadcast the
ringing tones sent to the paging port. The relay closures that
appear at the ringing terminals can be employed to energize
the external paging amplifier during the periods when the
ringing tones are being sent.
load requirements exceed this limit, connect the
load through an external slave relay. DO NOT
CONNECT THESE CONTROL TERMINALS
DIRECTLY TO THE 117VAC LINE.
Outside Lines
l
Common audible terminals provide
whenever any of the outside lines that are connected to
the common equipment.
a
dry-contact closure
NOTE: Refer to the following paragraph
Interface for
a
discussion of external paging
connections and information for using the
paging port ringing terminals in an alternate paging
enable function.
CURRENT
ONLY SEE CAUTION
AUDIBLE OR
TERMINALS
SLAVE RELAY CONNECTIONS FOR HIGH CURRENT
. SEE
TEXT)
VOLTAGREECOMMENDED
AS REWIRED
0
P O WE R
STATION CONNECTOR BLOCK
AND
0
B-LINE.
BASE
STATION
Figure 3-9. Typical Common
Interface Wiring
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
NOTE: This paging enable constant closure function
overrides the ring pattern closure provided
EXTERNAL PAGING
INTERFACE
A special transformer-isolated paging port is used to
when ringing is sent to the paging port.
See
the previous paragraph titled Common
couple the system to an external paging amplifier.
. .
. .
Relay closure dry-contact points are available at the
ringing port terminal and can be used for controlling
the external paging amplifier during a paging
operation. These contacts close and stay closed
during the time that a paging operation is active to
provide a constant enable signal path for the paging
amplifier.
l
l
Connect the audio input of an external paging
amplifier to the paging port as shown below in
Figure
If an enable signal is required by the paging
amplifier, connect the enable leads to the station 17
audible teminals as shown in Figure
PA SYSTEM
I
I
TO RINGING PORT
S TATION
BARRIER STR
BASE UNIT)
STATION CONNECTOR BLOCK
AND S-LINE,
BASE UNITS)
Figure
Typical External Paging Connection
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
closure feature is not available for use with this
installation.
EXTERNAL PAGING
INTERFACE LINE PORT
A line port can be configured by class of service
programming to be an AUXILIARY port. As an
AUXILIARY port, it can be used to couple a station to
an external paging device. This coupling is done from
any station with that line presence by pressing the
proper line key to select the AUXILIARY port. DTMF
tones or dial pulses can be dialed through the
l
The audio input of an external paging amplifier can
be connected to the tip and ring leads of the
AUXILIARY port as shown in Figure 3-11 below.
l
A DTMF tone select, zone-paging amplifier can be
employed if desired. If used, the zone-select code
must be dialed after the AUXILIARY port line select
key is pressed.
AUXILIARY port as needed. The paging enable relay
P ROGRAM LINE P ORT
AS AUXILIARY P ORT
AND CONNECT P A S YS TEM
TO TIP AND RING P AIR
OF THAT P ORT.
PA SYSTEM
AUDIO
I N P U T
COMMON EQUIPMENT
WNE. 16
BASE UNIT SHOWN1
I
I
TIP
TIP
2
I
I
TIP
TIP
I
4
TIP
TIP
5
I
I
6
RING 8
TIP
I
Figure
1. Typical External Paging Connection Line Port
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
.
.
.
common equipment) connection to the device RTS
(request-to-send) connection.
DATA DEVICE CONNECTIONS
‘The
provides two RS232 Data Ports for use.
NOTE: The common equipment requires
voltage, respect to signal ground, in order
send data.
a
positive
l
When a video display terminal
is used
perform class of service programming, connect it
RS232 Data Port A.
to
The default data format is as follows. Configure the
data device to match this data format for initial
operation.
l
When a serial data printer is used for SMDR,
SMDA, and
printout, connect it to the RS232
Data Port B.
7-bit data with
2
stop bits and no parity
The distance between the data device and the
common equipment can be up to 500 feet in a quiet
electrical environment. Shielded cable may be
required at some sites for long runs. For longer
distances, a limited distance modem must be used to
relay the data communications between the common
equipment and the data device.
Baud rate of 300 baud
The Data Ports are located as follows and are
connected as illustrated in Figure 3-12 on the next
&Station And
Clip terminals 37
Base Units
44
When preparing a cable for connection to a data
device, refer to the manufacturer’s manual for the
equipment being interfaced and make the following
40 (data port A) and 41
(data
B) on station connector block.
wiring
connections:
PORT B
SIG.
PORT A
TERMINAL 37
TERMINAL 38
CTS = TERMINAL 39
TERMINAL 40
TERMINAL 41
TERMINAL 42
TERMINAL 43
Wire the common equipment RD (data from device
to common equipment) connection to the device TD
(transmit data) connection.
TERMINAL 44
SG=
Wire the common equipment TD (data to device
from common equipment) connection to the device
RD (receive data) connection.
Base Unit
Special modular jacks are available as data ports
JACK CONN.
None 1
SIG
Wire the common equipment SG (signal ground)
connection to the device SG (signal ground)
connection.
CTS
RD
TD
2
3
4
5
If required for proper operation, wire the common
equipment CTS (clear-to-send status from device to
SG
None 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installat.
1111111111111111111
3- 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
impedance of this input is approximately 500 ohms.
Use the volume control on the music source to adjust
the audio level of the music as required.
MUSIC INTERFACE
If music is to be part of the system, connect a
customer-provided music source to the common
music interface jack (phono jack) provided
for this
as shown below in Figure 3-13. The
MUSIC SOURCE
(FOR MUSIC ON
BACKGROUND
Figure
MusicInterface
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
SECTION 3
ADD-ON EXPANSION MODULES
provides station ports 10 through 25 and lines 1
through 8. When installed, 408 Expansion module
will provide station ports 26 through 33 and lines 9
through 12 thus creating a twelve line by twenty-four
station system.
INTRODUCTION
a
One or two optional add-on expansion modules can
be installed on the common equipment base unit to
increase the line and station capacity of an installed
system. The add-on module is as follows:
Each expansion module provides a tip and
an emergency power failure circuit. This
connected to the first module-provided line.
pair as
is
l
408 Expansion Module
expansion unit
A four-line by eight-station
The expansion capabilities provided by the add-on
module are shown in Figure 3-14 on the next page.
The line connections of the expansion module are
available at two modular jacks. When facing the jack
openings, lines 1 and 2 are provided by the jack on
the right and lines 3 and 4 are provided by the jack on
the left. Line connections are detailed in Table 3-5,
below.
The default numbering of the expanded lines and
stations begin with the next higher line or station port
number from that provided by the host base unit. The
numbering continues sequentially from top module to
bottom module if two modules are installed. For
The station connections are available at a 50-pin
connector. Table 3-6 detail these station connections.
example: The defaulted
base unit
Table 3-5. Line Connections 408 Expansion Module
6
No Connection
I
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Installation
SYSTEM
&STATION BASE UNIT
AND
(BASE
PLUS ONE EXPANSION MODULE)
SYSTEM
AND PI-STATIONS
(BASE UNIT PLUS ONE EXPANSION MODULE)
&LINE, l&STATION BASE UNIT
SYSTEM
AND
(BASE
PLUS
MODULES)
(BASE
PLUS ONE EXPANSION MODULE)
SYSEM
AND
(BASE
PLUS TWO EXPANSION MODULES)
Figure 3-14. Add-On Expansion Module
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installa-‘on
66-083
Table 3-6. Statlon Connections 408 Expansion Module
3M
4M
4
30
9
5
10
PATH
6M
7M
POWER
STATION
SLATE-VIOLET
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
4. Push excess cable inside base unit housing
through connector opening.
INSTALLATION
Each add-on expansion module measures 15.5 wide x
high x 1.6 wide and weighs approximately 4
pounds. The modules are designed to be attached to
the base unit and connected to it via cabling.
5. install expansion module in place on all four
mounting holes. Be sure excess cable is not
pinched between add-on module and base unit.
6. Pull module down to latch in place.
l
The first module must be connected to the upper
location on the base unit.
7. Use flat-blade screw driver to tighten module
securing screw into base unit threaded fastener.
To install an expansion module to a base unit, refer to
Figure 3-15 and perform the following procedure.
8. Snap nameplate into slots on top of module
housing.
1. Disconnect both AC power and external battery
back-up power from the system.
9 . Attach a
or
insulated, solid copper wire
between the grounding terminal on the expansion
module and the grounding terminal on the common
equipment cabinet.
2. Remove and set aside nameplate from base
This action exposes internal cable connector on
base unit circuit board.
1 O.Refer to Chapter 4, and perform configuration
programming for new station and/or line ports.
3 . Reach through opening in base unit and mate
module cable plug with base unit circuit board
connectors.
TYPICAL BASE UNIT
BASE
lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
NAMEPLATE
(REMOVE TO EXPOSE BABE
CONNECTORS)
MOUNTING HOLES
PLACES)
.
LOWER
12 PLACES1
LOCATION-y
MODULES
TO BABE
UNIT
CABLE
AND PLUB
SCREW
SNAP SLOTS FOR
NAMEPLATE
TYPICAL ADD-ON MODULE
Figure
ExpansionModule
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
SECTION 4
CARTRIDGE
INTRODUCTION
A plug-in module is required with the common
equipment base unit to provide the following functions:
To avoid any chance of electrostatic
discharge damage to the software
cartridge, avoid touching the connector
with your fingers while handling it.
Operating System Software Control
Functional Program
Be sure to disconnect the AC power to the
base unit (also disconnect battery backup
power if it Is connected) before installing
or removing a software cartridge.
Call Cost Storage For System Collected Records
Installing the software cartridge provides the operating
system software control of the digital telephone
system.
To install a cartridge,
NOTE: Before installing a software cartridge into a
base unit, be sure the product code matches
the product code of the base unit (i-e., place an
SO408 cartridge into a GO408 base unit; place
All class of service data that is programmed into the
system is stored in the common equipment memory
and not in the software cartridge; therefore, no current
class of service programming is lost if the software
cartridge is replaced. Call cost records, however, are
stored in the software cartridge. If a new software
cartridge is exchanged for the one currently installed
in the common equipment cabinet, all call cost records
that are stored in the installed cartridge are lost.
Because of this, be sure to obtain a print-out of all call
cost records and then delete them from memory
before exchanging a new cartridge for the currently
installed one.
an SO816 cartridge into a
6 base unit;
and place an
base unit.
cartridge into a G 1632
1. Orient the
so that the connector end is
toward the base unit opening and the removal
notch, located at the top rear of the cartridge, is
toward the front of the base unit.
2. Insert the cartridge into the base unit cabinet with a
steady gentle pressure until it seats into place.
Then, press the cartridge into place firmly to fully
mate the connections.
INSTALLATION
The software cartridge plugs into the common
equipment base unit housing as shown in Figure 3-16.
To remove a cartridge,
1. Place the bit of a flat-blade screwdriver into the
removal notch. Lift up on the cartridge with the
screwdriver to un-mate the connections.
2. Slide the cartridge out of the base unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Figure 3-16. Software Cartridge
and Removal
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
SECTION 5
DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE
DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM
Arrange both station-to-trunk and station-to-station
data communications through the system stations,
using a data device, a modem, and a data switch.
l
With the accessory headset connected to the data
switch, set the compatibility control to 9.
The data switch has a phase switch located on the
right side of the cabinet.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Any data device (such as a VDT or a personal
computer equipped with communications
l
Set this switch to the NORMAL position (toward the
rear of the cabinet).
It is very important to set the telephone volume
control to the minimum level.
Any Hayes-compatible modem
A data switch (such as the model PC-787JJ from
Precision Components Telephone, Addison IL,
COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES
STATION-TO-TRUNK
60
1, telephone: l-708-543-6400)
To make a data transmission to a distant site over a
line,
CONNECTIONS
Refer to Figure 3-l 7, and connect the equipment as
illustrated. Certain digital telephone models include
1. Set data switch to VOICE.
a
headset jack located on the rear housing near the line
jack. This headset jack marking reads
Installing this telephone requires the following
connection changes:
2.
Prepare modem and data device for data
communications. Refer to information supplied
with software and equipment.
3 . Press telephone line button and hear dial tone.
4. Set data switch to DATA.
The telephone handset remains connected to the
telephone and left on-hook.
5. Issue dialing command to modem from data device
keyboard.
Connect the accessory headset to the handset jack
of the data switch.
STATION-TO-STATION
To make a data transmission to another station
equipped and connected as shown in Figure
Connect the telephone jack of the data switch to the
headset jack of the telephone. Do not connect it to
the the handset jack as illustrated. Make this
connection with the modular cable supplied with the
data switch. Make the modem and data device
connections using cabling specified in the literature
accompanying this equipment.
,
1. Set data switch to VOICE.
2 . Prepare modem and data device for data
communications. Refer to information supplied
with software and equipment.
3 . Press
4 . Dial other station and set up voice call.
5 . Type D on data device keyboard but do not
press ENTER. Ask intercom party to type
on telephone and hear dial tone.
The data switch has a compatibility control located on
the bottom of the cabinet. Set this control to match
the telephone equipment being used.Change the
on
settings
2 positions from the specified settings to
their data device keyboard but do not press
ENTER.
provide the quietest data path possible.
Use a flat blade screw driver to set the compatibility
control as follows:
6. Complete voice conversation, ask intercom party to
set their data switch to DATA and to press ENTER
on their keyboard.
l
With the telephone handset connected to the data
switch as illustrated, set the compatibility control to
position 5.
7 . Set data switch to DATA, and press ENTER on
data device keyboard. Modems will automatically
complete data connection.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEPHONE JACK
DATA JACK
.
INTERCONNECT
CABLE
Wlth Data
JACK
(SEE NOTE 1)
TYPICAL
DATA SWITCH
(SEE TEXT)
TELEPHONE HANDSET
(SEE NOTE 1)
TYPICAL DATA MODEM
TYPICAL DATA DEVICE
NOTE
When the telephone Is
a headset
the
handset
(PERSONAL COMPUTER OR
The accessory
remains connected to the telephone and Is left on-hook.
The cable
the handset/a& of the data switch.
headset Is then
that
the data
Is connected between the telephone jack
of the data
and the headset jack of the telephone.
Flgure 3-17. Data Communlcatlons Interconnection Diagram
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
SECTION 6
SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND FAILURE ISOLATION
GENERAL CHECK
INITIAL CONDITION
The system operating features are set to
1. Check the red light emitting diode (LED) system
status indicator. Be sure that it is on steady. If
off or flashing, refer to the paragraph below titled,
Failure Isolation.
conditions at initial power-up. These conditions
provide a basic operating system with a known set of
parameters, and the system should be initially
checked out with the default conditions in place. At
any time while the system is operating, default
conditions can be reset from station port 10 or 12 per
the instructions provided in Chapter 4, Programming.
is
2. Refer to Chapter 5 for operating information and
perform a general operational test of the system by
exercising the features from station port 10 or 11.
Operational parameters are per the system default
conditions as detailed in Chapter 4 until class of
service programming is performed.
CHECK OUT
Check the common equipment and telephone
installation for proper operation by performing the
following resistance and voltage measurements.
3 . Once the basic system is verified as operational,
perform the class of service programming as
described in Chapter 4.
RESISTANCE CHECK
FAILURE ISOLATION
Measure the resistance at the station connector blocks
under the following conditions.
SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR
A red LED located on the common equipment cabinet
near the music port is the system status indicator.
This indicator is turned on steady when power is
AC power cord disconnected from electrical outlet.
Common equipment connected to station connector
blocks.
applied to the system.
If the indicator flashes after
power up, it could be indicating a processor failure.
Unplug and reconnect the AC power to the power
supply and observe the LED indication. If it still shows
Stations wired and wiring punched down on blocks.
a
flashing indication, equipment replacement may be
Bridging clips removed from blocks to isolate
stations from common equipment.
necessary.
STATION SELF TEST
Measure the resistance of each installed station and
wiring from the station side of the connector blocks.
Resistance values will vary with cable length and
station type but should be within the following limits:
The multiline stations can be self tested for proper
operation per the following instructions:
1. Disconnect line cord at station base.
Greater than 700 Kohms
2 . Press and hold MUTE and reconnect line cord to
station connector. Station will automatically
perform self test routine.
VOLTAGE CHECK
Make the following voltage measurements at the
station connector blocks under the following conditions:
3 . Release MUTE as soon as test begins. Sequence
of test is as follows:
l
Bridging clips installed
l
l
Indicators will light in sequence
l
AC power connected to the common equipment
Ringer will sound
or high
be sure volume is set to low
Measure the voltage across the signal pair. The
measured voltage must be within the following limits:
l
Indicators and ringer will then turn off at the
same time
Replace any station that does not pass the
test.
4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Installation
SECTION 7
INSTALLER/USER INFORMATION
REGARDING FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS
discontinue service to the trouble site after they notify the
user of the reason.
This electronic key system complies with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules, Part 68. The
FCC registration label on the KSU contains the FCC
registration number, the ringer equivalence number, the
model number, and the serial number or production date of
the system.
REPAIR AUTHORIZATION
FCC regulations do not permit repair of customer owned
equipment by anyone except the manufacturer, their
authorized agent, or others who might be authorized by the
FCC. However, routine repairs can be made according to
the maintenance instructions in this publication, provided
that all FCC restrictions are obeyed.
NOTIFICATION TO TELEPHONE COMPANY
Unless a telephone operating company provides and installs
the system, the telephone operating company which
provides the lines must be notified before a connection is
made to them. The lines (telephone numbers) involved, the
FCC registration number, and the ringer equivalence number
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
The electronic key system contains incidental radio
frequency generating circuitry and, if not installed and used
properly, may cause interference to radio and television
reception. This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A computing device
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when operated in a commercial environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause
interference to radio and television reception; in which case
the user is encouraged to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference. If this equipment does
cause interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures: Reorient the television or
radio’s receiving antenna, and/or relocate the KSU, the
individual telephone stations, and the radio or TV with
respect to each other. If necessary, the user should consult
the manufacturer or an experienced
must be provided to the telephone company.
FCC
registration number and the ringer equivalence number of
this equipment are provided on the label attached to the
common equipment.The user/installer is required to notify
the telephone company when final disconnection of this
equipment from the telephone company line occurs.
COMPATIBILITY WITH TELEPHONE NETWORK
When necessary, the telephone operating company provides
information on the maximum number of telephones or
ringers that can be connected to one line, as well as any
other applicable technical information. The telephone
operating company can temporarily discontinue service and
make changes which could affect the operation of this
equipment. They must, however, provide adequate notice,
in writing, of any future equipment changes that would make
the system incompatible.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
technician for additiinal suggestions. The user may find the
following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications
Commission helpful: “How to Identify and Resolve Radio-TV
Interference Problems.” This booklet is available from the
Connection of the electronic key system to the telephone
lines must be through a universal service order code
(USOC) outlet jack supplied by the telephone operating
company. If the installation site does not have the proper
outlet, ask the telephone company business off ice to install
one. The correct outlet jack for this system is either a type
RJ21 X or type
Government Printing
Washington D.C. 20402. Stock
This digital apparatus does not exceed the (Class A) limits
for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the
Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department
of Communications.
PARTY LINES AND COIN LINES
Local telephone company regulations may not permit
connections to party lines and coin lines by anyone except
the telephone operating company.
Le present appareil
pes de bruits
aux
les limites
appareils
(de la class A)
sur le brouillage radioelectrique
des Communications du Canada.
dans le
par le
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a service problem occurs, first try to determine
the
trouble is in the on-site system or in the telephone company
equipment. Disconnect all equipment not owned by the
telephone company.
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER
The REN of each line is 0.48. The FCC requires the
installer to determine the total REN for each line, and record
it at the equipment.
if this corrects the problem, the
equipment must not be
reconnected to the telephone line until the problem has been
corrected. Any trouble that causes improper operation of the
telephone network may require the telephone company to
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System
66-083
CHAPTER4
SYSTEMPROGRAMMING
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Configuration programming is performed from station
port 10 or station port 12. The programming station
should be an LCD Speakerphone. Any digital
telephone can be installed at station port 10 or 12 and
used for programming but LCD feedback of the
programming operations will not be available.
Programming commands will not be accepted from
any other station port in the system. Station 10 or 12
configuration programming consists of the following
categories:
l
l
Station names
SMDA reports
programming can be performed from any
customer-provided Video Display Terminal (VDT) with
an RS-232 compatible, serial interface. VDT
programming is completely menu driven and easy to
follow. It is arranged somewhat differently from station
port programming categories to facilitate menu usage.
VDT programming is discussed in Section 4 of this
chapter.
Class Of Service Programming: This class of
service programming is unlimited as to the features
that can be programmed using it. Class of service
programming is usually performed by the installer
when the system is first put into service.
Prior to taking any programming action, determine the
desired parameters and requirements. Record this
data on the programming reference tables provided for
this purpose along-side the station programming
procedures in the following sections.
Programming: The administration
programming can be used to program all system
features except line attributes and the master clear.
This procedure is usually employed by on-site
personnel whenever system needs dictate.
Block programming can be performed after a
configuration has been programmed for
a
particular
line or station. Block programming will program a
group of lines or stations to have the same
configuration as the programmed one. This feature
eliminates the need to individually program every line
or station that requires the same configuration.
Attendant
The attendant
programming is limited to those features which may
need reprogramming by the system attendant, such as:
l
l
l
l
l
System clock setting
System speed dial
Night transfer of ringing
Music on hold
PROGRAMMING OVERLAYS
programming overlay is included with each system
for use in identifying the buttons required for
programming. The overlay fits over the buttons of the
A
programming station.
A
full size copy of the
programming overlay is included at the end of this
chapter for use as needed.
LCD messages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
SECTION 2
CLASS OF SERVICE PROGRAMMING
remainder of the system variables to remain set to
their values.
Class of service programming is usually performed by
the system installer. Class of service programming
procedures provide the means for programming all of
the system variables. The installer may elect to
program only the line attributes and allow the
Perform class of service programming as shown
below.
Mark the desired selections in the
charts to record programming needs.
Enter the base level programming mode.
TYPICAL FEATURE PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
\
Automatic Hold For Intercom
feature enabled, pressing another
intercom button or line button while
already on an intercom call will
10 57: Dial 10
r next station fea
place this existing call on
h o l d .
Dial
for configuration
Dial a feature code to select a programming
parameter.
A current program setting is indicated by a lighted
LED next to the applicable programming button.
When a toggle (ON/OFF) action is provided by a
single button, the lighted LED indicates when the
feature is active.
Press
to return to the most previous
If a tone burst sounds three times during
programming, it denotes an erronous input.
Programming can be continued after an error
without ending and re-entering the programming
programming level. Each press returns to the
next previous programming level.
mode
base level..
Press SPKR to end procedure.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MASTER CLEAR
The entire programming configuration, as discussed in the following programming procedures, can be defaulted to the factory settings at once
using the Master Clear procedure.
on/y does
action
ALL programmed
stored
a known state of
operatlon, It also clears all
and speed dial numbers.
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
Base Level: The first step in any
programming sequence is to enter the
base level. Once in this mode, the
master clear can be performed.
Press
Dial
# 7 4 6
“COW/G. MODE”
Master Clear: Returns entire system
to default and clears all stored auto
and speed dial numbers.
Dial 90.
“MASTER CLEAR
6 8 4 to clear the entire system. System
Dial 5
1
returns to normal operation mode automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM DEFAULTS
l
l
Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs.
Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection.
NOTE: A current program setting is indicated by a lighted
next to
for that selection. When a toggle
action
is provided
a sing/e button,
lighted LED indicates an active feature.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Press
Dial
7 4 6
MODE
Base Level: The first step in any
programming sequence is to enter the
base level. Once in this mode, any
desired configuration can be set.
“SYSTEM DEFAULT”
Press to default system features.
System returns to configuration mode.
Dial 10.
System Default: The system
configuration features can be
defaulted to factory settings. These
values will provide satisfactory system
performance in a broad range of site
applications.
“LINE DEFAULT
Llne Default: The line configuration
features can be defaulted to factory
settings. These values will provide
satisfactory system performance in a
broad range of site applications.
Dial 30.
Press # to default line features.
System returns to configuration mode.
“STATION DEFAULT
Dial 00 to default station ports system-wide.
Dial 50.
Statlon Default: The station
configuration features can be
defaulted to factory settings. These
provide
performance in a broad range of site
applications.
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57 .
Dial for additional stations to default.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEMCONFIGURATION
Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs.
Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection.
A current program setting is indicated a lighted LED next to for selection.
When a
is provided by a sing/e button, the lighted LED indicates an active feature.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Press
Dial
7 4 6
Level: The first step in any
rogramming sequence is to enter the
ase level. Once in this mode, any
esired configuration can be set.
“SYSTEM DEFAULT”
default system features.
1. Dial 10.
2. Press
Defauft: The system
onfiguration features, described in
following procedures, can be
lefautted to a standard set of values.
values will provide satisfactory
ystem performance in a broad range
site applications.
“TRANSFER RECALL
“STA XFR RCL XXX
CallTransferRecall
A transferred call that remains
after a programmed
1. Dial 11.
2. Dial
1
(sta xfr recall).
of time will return to the
ransfening station for answering.
Dial 2 (dept xfr recall).
3. Choose transfer time.
Dial 1 or Press Al.
Dial 2 or Press A2.
Dial 3 or Press A3.
Dial 4 or Press A4.
Dial 5 or Press
RCL XXX”
XFR RCL
XFR RCL 20
“STA XFR RCL 25
XFR RCL 30
XFR RCL 45
Dial 6 or Press
XFR RCL 60
XFR RCL 90
Dial 7 or Press
Dial 8 or Press
Dial 9 or Press Al 1.
Dial 0 or Press A12.
XFR RCL 120
XFR RCL
“STA XFR RCL 400
4. Press
5. Press
for next transfer recall feature.
configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
REFERENCE RECORD
1. Dial 12
“RECALUFLSH XXXX”
Recall/Flash:
A
line disconnect
or a host system feature
signal (flash) can be
depending upon the
time.
2. Select time.
“RECALUFLSH 0.08”
WECALUFLSH 0.30”
WECALUFLSH 0.50”
“RECALUFLSH 0.60”
“RECALUFLSH 0.75”
“RECALUFLSH 0.88”
“RECALUFLSH
Dial
1
or Press Al.
Dial 2 or Press A2.
3 or Press A3.
Dial 4 or Press A4.
Dial 5 or Press A5.
Dial 6 or Press A6.
Dial 7 or Press
I 3.0
I
Dial
6
or Press
“RECALUFLSH 7.50”
“RECALUFLSH 2
“RECALUFLSH 3
DEFAULT 2.0 sec.
Dial 9 or Press Al 1.
Dial or Press A12.
0
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
a
“PAUSE
XXX
1. Dial 13
2. Select time.
Dial or Press Al.
Pause Tlme: During auto dials and
speed dials, it is sometimes
necessary to delay the sending of
to give switching equipment
time to prepare for receiving them. A
pause is stored whenever the user
presses the HOLD button. The pause
length options are stored in seconds.
“PAUSE TIME 0.50
“PAUSE TIME 1
“PAUSE TIME 1.50
“PAUSE TIME 2
“PAUSE TIME 3
“PAUSE TIME 5
“PAUSE TIME 7.50
“PAUSE TIME 10
“PAUSE TIME 15
“PAUSE TIME 20
1
Dial 2 or Press A2.
Dial 3 or Press A3.
Dial 4 or Press A4.
Dial 5 or Press A5.
Dial 6 or Press A6.
Dial 7 or Press
Dial 6 or Press
Dial 9 or Press Al 1.
Dial 0 or Press A12.
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
“HOLD RECALL XXXX”
1. Dial 14
2. Select time.
‘lmed Hold Recall: After a call has
een on hold for a programmed
of time, the system will recall
station that placed the call on
old. The timing is in seconds.
“HOLD RECALL 30
“HOLD RECALL 60
“HOLD RECALL 90
“HOLD RECALL 120
“HOLD RECALL 180
“HOLD RECALL 240
“HOLD RECALL 300
“HOLD RECALL 360
Dial 1 or Press Al.
Dial 2 or Press A2.
Dial 3 or Press A3.
Dial 4 or Press A4.
Dial 5 or Press
Dial 6 or Press A8.
Dial 7 or Press
Dial
8
or Press
Dial 9 or Press All. “HOLD RECALL 420
“HOLD RECALL
for configuration mode.
Dial 0 or Press A12.
3. Dial
‘BAUD RATE
1. Dial 15.
2. Dial for data port A.
Baud Rate: The speed or baud
ate of the data bit stream, which
the SMDR and configuration
lata between the system and an
rxternal data device, must be
to match the
1
Dial 2 for data port B
3. Choose baud rate.
Dial 01 or Press Al.
Dial 02 or Press A2.
Dial 03 or Press A3.
Dial 04 or Press A4.
Dial 05 or Press A5.
Dial 06 or Press A8.
Dial 07 or Press
110”
equirements of the data device.
“W
300”
600”
VOTE:
to be
used for data transfer between
a VDT and the common
1200”
2400”
4800”
9600”
19200”
equipment,
required.
data is
Dial 08 or Press
Dial 09 or Press Al
Dial 10 or Press A7 for 7
data bits and 2 stop bits. “W
Dial 11 or Press Al4 for 8
data bits and 1 stop bit.
ZZZZZ”
ZZZZZ”
4. Dial
5. Dial
for next data port.
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
“XXXXX ANN.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
VOICE
1. Dial 16.
or
Slgnalllng: Intercom
DEFAULT
VOICE
2. Press Al to toggle between Voice To Tone.
can be tone signalled or voice
The first choice in
is programmable.
(LED On = voice signalling).
“VOICE ANN.
“TONE ANN. FIRST”
for configuration mode.
Dial
Dial 2 for Tone First.
3. Dial
1
for Voice First.
DELETE XXX
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On Enable).
1. Dial 18.
Delete Statlon Message Detall
(SMDA)recordsby
Attendant: When SMDA records
exceed storage capacity, they must
DISABLE
DEFAULT
DISABLE
be deleted to make mom for more.
DELETE ON
DELETE OFF
Dial
(Al LED On).
Dial 2 to Disable
1
to Enable
The attendant can be allowed to
delete these records if enabled by this
programming step.
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
NOT DISTURB
XXXXXXXX
2. Press Al to toggle between Enable and disable
1. Dial 19.
D
ONot
(DND) Inhlblt:Any
I
DISABLED!
DEFAULT
station can be set to a DND condition
which cannot be overridden by a
caller unless calling station is
programmed for DND override. The
DND feature can be disabled by this
programming.
(LED On Enable).
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
Dial
(Al LED ON).
1
to Enable
Dial 2 to Disable.
NOTE: Also program a button as the
DND button. See page 4-44.
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
I
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
“MONITOR XXXXXXX”
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On Enable).
STATION MONITORING
ENABLED
1. Dial 20.
Monltorlng: The
station provides idle, busy and line
inging status of monitored stations. If
he flashing BLF lights associated with
ring indication are deemed
at
DEFAULT
DISABLED
“MONITOR ENABLED”
Dial 1 to Enable
(Al LED ON).
distracting, this visual indication can
disabled system-wide.
“MONITOR
DISABLED”
Dial 2 to Disable.
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
P. RECALL X
1. Dial 22.
Call Park Recall Tlme: A call that is
2. Select recall time:
Program button LED On = Selected Time
Press Al or dial 1 min. “C.P. RECALL X
left in
a
parking orbit for
a
programmed length of time
automatically returns to a timed hold
recall condition at the parking station.
1
Press A2 or dial 2 = 2 min.
Press A3 or dial 3 = 3 min.
Press A4 or dial 4 = 4 min.
Press A5 or dial 5 = 5 min.
Press A8 or dial 6 = 6 min.
Press A9 or dial 7
Never Recall
“NEVER RECALL”
for configuration mode.
3. Dial
“XXXXXXX EXC HOLD”
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On Enable).
1. Dial 23.
Hold: This feature
prevents a held call from being
retrieved at any other extension. It
can be enabled or disabled
system-wide.
“ENABLE EXC HOLD
Dial 1 to enable
(Al LED on).
“DISABLE EXC HOLD”
Dial 2 to disable.
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
1
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
Dial 24. “TANDEM ATTN XXX
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On = Enable).
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant: When this
eature is enabled, a recall from an
call transfer or timed hold
will ring at both attendant
stations. When disabled, only the
attendant station which transferred
call will ring.
Dial 1 to enable.
Dial 2 to disable
(Al LED is on).
“TANDEM ATTN OFF”
“TANDEM ATTN ON
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
“AUTO STA
1. Dial 27
Statlon
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On Enable)
this feature, the system will
automatically recognize
a
particular
station should that station be
re-located to a different station port,
and supply the same COS
parameters as programmed for the
station at the original port.
Dial
Dial 2 to Disable
3. Dial for configuration mode.
1
to Enable (Al LED On)
NOTE: Refer
station fe-assignment
on page 4-51.
ALARM REPORT
ENABLE
1. Dial 28.
“ALARM REPORTS
System Alarm Reportlng: Special
codes which convey certain system
alarm conditions can be sent to a
station where they will show on the
LCD display.
NOTE: Also, choose the alarm
reporting stations. See page
4-35.
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable.
DISABLE
(LED On = Enable)
DEFAULT
DISABLE
Dial
Dial 2 to disable.
3. Dial for configuration mode.
1
to enable.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
Programming:
“FEATURE INHIBIT”
. Dial 29.
features can be disabled
. Select feature.
ystem-wide to provide a basic
Dial 01 to disable Line Group 1.
Dial 02 to disable Line Group 2.
Dial 03 to disable Line Group 3.
Dial 04 to disable Line Group 4.
Dial 05 to disable Zone 1 Paging.
Dial 06 to disable Zone 2 Paging.
Dial 07 to disable Zone 3 Paging.
Dial 08 to disable All Call.
system for use in
where a large proportion
the stations are accessible to
users thus subject to
These features are
when system default is
Dial 09 to disable Meet Me Page.
Dial 10 to disable Night Transfer.
Dial 11 to disable Background Music.
Dial 12 to disable Voice Announce Block.
Dial 13 to disable Message Waiting.
Dial 14 to disable Call Pickup.
Dial 15 to disable Call Forward.
Dial 16 to disable Automatic Call Back.
Dial 17 to disable Station-to-Station Messaging.
Dial 18 to disable Line Group Queue.
Dial 19 to disable Directed Station Hold.
Dial 20 to disable Call Park Orbit 1.
Dial 21 to disable Call Park Orbit 2.
Dail 22 to disable Call Park Orbit 3.
Dial 23 to disable Call Park Orbit 4.
Dial 24 to disable Call Park Orbit 5.
Dial 25 to disable Call Park Orbit 6.
Dial 26 to disable Call Park Orbit 7.
Dial 27 to disable Call Park Orbit 8.
Dial 28 to disable Call Park Orbit
Dial 29 to disable Call Waiting.
DEFAULT ALL ENABLED
Dial 30 to disable LCD Messaging.
Dial 31 to disable Executive Override/Service
Observing.
NOTE: Feature status is not conveyed via LED.
Dial 32 to disable Account Code.
Dial 33 to disable Personal Call Forward
Dial 34 to Enable All Features.
Dial
for next item.
for configuration
Dial
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
Ringing
1. Dial 60.
Options: The PA port can be
lines for direct ring, delayed
OPTIONS
ing, or night transfer (of ringing). The
can also be arranged to receive
zone or all-call paging.
2. Choose ringing assignment.
“DIRECT RING
“DELAY RING
“NIGHT RING
Dial
1
for direct ring.
Dial 2 for delay ring.
Dial 3 for night ring.
3. Select line ports:
tracking of the enabled ringing
be selected as either station 17
inging or paging port ringing.
Line port
Line port
= Dial 01 14 or press Al Al4
= Dial or press
Line port 17-24 = Dial 17
24.
or press HOLD then press Al A8
NOTE: LEDS turn on when line is
assigned.
4. Dial
Dial
for next PA option.
for configuration mode.
Zone Paglng
1. Dial 60.
2. Dial 4 to assign
zone paging
“P.A. OPTIONS
“PA ZONES
3. Choose zone.
Press Al or dial
1
for zone 1.
Press A2 or dial 2 for zone 2.
Press A3 or dial 3 for zone 3.
Press A4 or dial 4 for all-call.
NOTE: Al, A2, A3, or A4 LED turns on when
a zone is assigned.
4. Dial
Dial
for next PA option
for configuration mode.
Continued on next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continued from previous page
Options continued
Tracking Relay
1. Dial 60.
P O R T
“RELAY XXXXXXX”
2. Dial 5.
3. Choose relay tracking assignment.
Press Al to toggle between
paging port and station port 17.
(LED On = paging port)
Dial 1 for station port 17. “RELAY STA. 17
“RELAY P.A. PORT”
Dial 2 for paging port.
4. Dial for next PA option.
-OR-
Dial
for configuration mode.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
XXXX”
1. Dial 26
Extended DTMF Tones For
2. Choose DTMF tone length
Press Al or dial 01 = 60 msec.
Press A2 or dial 02 80 msec.
Press A3 or dial 03 = 100 msec.
Dlallng: When a number
is automatically dialed (autodial,
saved number redial, etc), the length
of the generated DTMF tones are as
set with this programming option.
This is useful when the automatically
dialed number is to be used to access
answering machines, banking
computers, voice mail, etc that require
DTMF tones that are longer than
standard tones.
Press A4 or dial
= 120 msec.
Press A5 or dial 05 160 msec.
Press A6 or dial 66 = 240 msec.
Press A7 or dial 07 320 msec.
Press A8 or dial
Press A9 or dial
= 400 msec.
= 480 msec.
Press A10 or dial 10 = 560 msec.
Press All or dial 11 = 720 msec.
Press Al 2 or dial 12 = 880 msec.
Press Al3 or dial 13 = 1040 msec.
3. Dial for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LINECONFIGURATION
Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs.
Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection.
A current program setting is indicated
provided button, the
When a toggle
action is
a lighted LED next to the programming button for that selection.
LED indicates an active feature.
a
To make a line port selection, press a programming button or dial a selection number on the keypad as follows:
KEYPAD BUTTONS
LINE
PROG. BUTTONS
01
14
Al Al4
17-24
17 24
HOLD plus Al
A8
NOTE HOLD button is used to toggle program buttons between lines 1
14 and 17
24.
“LINE DEFAULT
2. Press # to default line features.
Llne De f a ut t : The line configuration
features, described in the following
procedures, can be defaulted to a
standard set of values. These values
will provide satisfactory system
in a broad range of site
System automatically returns to base level.
Ll ne
A line port can be taken
out of service because of defect or
other reason. Return the line to service
with the central office lines
2. Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On = Disabled).
Line
1-14 = Dial 01
14 or Press Al
or press
24
Al 4
programming
procedure.
Line port
= Dial
Line port 17-24 = Dial 17
D then press Al
A8.
3 . Dial
for configuration
mo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
1. Dial 32.
2. Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On = Disabled).
“AUXILIARY LINES
Llnes: A line port can be
to serve as a port for an
paging amplifier.
I ENTRY I
I
16
IO I
Line port I-14 Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al4
Line port
= Dial
or press
Line port 17-24 = Dial 17 24
Press HOLD then press Al A6.
for configuration mode.
3. Dial
1. Dial 33.
2. Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On Disabled).
LINES”
Off Ice Llnes: A line port can
conditioned to serve as a port for a
telephone company supplied
office line.
Line port I-14 = Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al4
Line port Dial Bl,
Line port 17-24 Dial 17 24
Press HOLD then press Al A6.
for configuration mode.
3. Dial
“LINE NAME”
1. Dial 34.
2. Select line ports to be disabled
Llne Names: Lines can be named as
to their function to identify them for use.
Names such as WATTS, CO, etc.,
when appearing on the display, make
locating a desired line easier for the
station user to do. Up to five characters
can be used to form a line name.
(LED On = Disabled).
tine port I-14 = Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al4
Line port = Dial or press Bl,
Line port 17-24 = Dial 17 24
Press HOLD then press Al A8.
3. Press # to clear current name.
NO LINE NAMES ASSIGNED
4. Dial line name char. codes (5 char. max.).
See character code chart (Table 4-l on Page 4-21).
Examples:
WATTS = Dial 9121 81 81 73
0156 = Dial 00,
(Each character must be represented by two digits.)
5. Dial and repeat last three steps for next line.
-OR-
.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
r
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
1. Dial 35
2. Dial 0 for no groups assigned
Ine Groups: Outside lines of the
type-can be grouped together for
outgoing access. Access codes
the line groups are:
“NO LINE GROUP”
“L/NE GROUP
Dial
(LED On
2. Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On Disabled).
1
for Line Group 1
Lines Assigned)
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3 = Dial 82
Group 4 = Dial 83
Dial 9
Dial 81
Line port 1-14
Line port
Line port 17-24 Dial 17 24
Dial 01
Dial
14 or Press Al Al4
or press
System must be strapped for
Press HOLD then press Al
A8.
hybrid operation, as detailed in
Chapter 3, before
4. Dial
Dial
for next group.
programming feature is
for next feature.
available. A line group queue
button can be assigned on a per
station basis as detailed on page
“LINE GROUP 2”
5. Dial 2 for Line Group 2
(LED On
Lines Assigned)
8. Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On
Disabled).
-14orPressAl -A14
Line port 17-24
Dial 17 24
Press HOLD then press Al
for next group.
A8.
7. Dial
Dial
8. Dial 3 for Line Group 3
(LED On Lines Assigned)
line ports:
Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On Disabled).
for configuration mode.
“L/NE GROUP 3”
9.
Line port l-14 Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al4
Line port
Dial
or press
, B2
Line port 17-24
Dial 17 24
Press HOLD then press Al
for next group.
A8.
10. Dial
Dial
for configuration mode.
Line Groups
continued on next page
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for ba s e l e ve l .
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
‘EATURE
DESCRIPTION
“L/NE GROUP 4
Dial 4 for Line Group 4.
(LED On Lines Assigned)
Groups continued
11. Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On = Disabled).
Line port I-14
Dial 01
14 or Press Al Al4
Line port 15, 16 = Dial
or press Bl
,
Line
17-24
Dial 17
24
Press HOLD then press Al
A8.
12. Dial
Dial
for next group.
for configuration mode.
“PULSE DIAL
1. Dial 36.
Whenrotary
2. Select pulse dial line ports (LED On = Pulse):
lines are installed, the user can
from pulse (rotary dial signalling)
tone (dual tone multiple frequency
for accessing special circuits
Line port I-14
Line
Dial 01
Dial
14 or Press Al Al4
or press
Line port 17-24
Dial 17
24
DTMF tones such as banking
etc. Line port dialing must
Press HOLD then press Al
A8.
programmed as pulse for rotary dial
ine interfacing or tone for DTMF line
Dial
3. Dial
to default all lines to pulse dial.
for configuration mode.
“TONE DIAL
1. Dial 37
2. Select tone dial line ports (LED On = Tone):
Line port I-14 Dial 01 14 or Press Al
Line 15, 16 = Dial or press Bl , B2
Line port 17-24 = Dial 17
Al4
24
Press HOLD then press Al
A8.
Dial 00 to default all lines to tone dial.
3. Dial for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
I
“HOLD RELEASE 50
2. Select hold release time for line ports.
ENTRY
1. Dial 38.
Hold Release: When a
1
9
17
I
party abandons a hold condition
disconnects, the central office will
a forward disconnect signal to the
The signal can be either 50
(LED On = 50 msec.)
Line port l-14 Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al4
Line port
= Dial
or press
B2
nsec. or 350 msec. in length. Program
he system to match the central off ice
Line port 17-24
Dial 17
24
Press HOLD then press Al A8.
for configuration mode.
DEFAULT
50 MSEC.
3. Dial
“DEPT.
1. Dial 39.
2. Select department.
Dial 0 for none.
Departmental
ines can be assigned to one of four
departments. Calls received
Outside
“NO DEPARTMENT
“DEPARTMENT 1
“DEPARTMENT 2
“DEPARTMENT 3
“DEPARTMENT 4
a
line assigned to
for any idle station in that
department to ring.
a
department will
Dial
1
for dept 1.
Dial 2 for dept 2.
Dial 3 for dept 3.
Dial 4 for dept 4.
I
Assign stations to
departments
on page 4-31.
3. Select line ports to be disabled
(LED On = Disabled).
8
74
I
DEFAULT
NO DEPARTMENT/LINE
ASSIGNMENTS
the procedure
Line port l-14 = Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al4
,
Line port 15, 16
Line port 17-24
Dial
Dial 17
or press
24
Press HOLD then press Al A8.
for next department.
4. Dial
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 8 for base level.
r
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
“PRIVACY RELEASE
I
1. Dial 40.
A
line can be
private or non-private. In the
2. Select line ports to be non-private
(LED On = Non Private):
rivate mode, a station has exclusive
se of a line during a call. Lines are
rivate unless re-programmed making
non-private.
Line port I-14
Dial 01 14 or Press Al
Al4
Line port 15, 16 = Dial
or press
Line port 17-24
Dial 17
24
a
to
Press HOLD then press Al
for configuration mode.
A8.
8
I
I
DEFAULT ALL LINES PRIVATE
as a privacy release button as
detailed on page 4-43.
3. Dial
PORT EN
1
2
“ASSIGN
PORT!
Llne To Llne Port
programming attributes for a line
particular line
can be m-assigned to a different
ne port by this programming action.
his feature allows all software
1. Dial 41.
2. Select currently assigned line port number.
l a
I
I
LATCH XX
hat is connected to
a
Line port I-14
Dial 01 14 or Press Al
Dial
Al4
Line port 15, 18
Line port 17-24
or press
Dial 17
24
for
with those assigned to
mother line at different line port
a
line to be automatically
Press HOLD then press Al
3. Dial new line port number (01 24 = line 1
A8.
a
24).
physically re-locating the lines
“LOG/CAL LINE XX
reprogramming any line attributes.
4. Dial # to make assignment.
5. Repeat steps 2 -4 for another assignment.
VOTE: refer page 3-4 for additional
discussion.
8. Dial
for configuration mode.
ODEL
BLOCKFD LINES
Programmlng: Features that
assigned to a particular line can be
to another line or to an entire
of lines with one programming
action.
I
“ELK PROGRAMMING
“MODEL LINE XX
Line port l-l 4 Press Al Al 4
1. Dial 42.
2. Select model line port
Line port
Line port 17-24
= Press Bl
Press HOLD then press Al
3. Select lines to match model line
(press buttons as detailed above).
4. Dial
and repeat steps 2 and 3 for next model
Dial
for configuration mode.
Continued on next page
Press SPKR to em-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Block Programmlng continued
PROGRAMMING
2. Select model line port with keypad.
“MODEL LINE
2. Select line ports to be disabled
Line port 1
Line
14 = Press Al
= Press
Al4
Line Port 17
press Al A6
24 = Press HOLD then
3. Dial first line port in block (dial code as above).
4. Dial
5. Dial last line port In block (dial code as above).
6. Dial
7. Dial
for next model line.
Dial
for configuration mode.
NOTE: The
last and
In
be
To
fine and last
For example:
line 02 he same as
an
the
be
same
is programmed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table
CHARACTER DIALING CODES CHART
I
C O D E I
2 1
22
23
C O D E I C H A R
I
A
B
C
a
b
2 4
25
26
Sp a c e 12
1 5
17
C
.
t D
d
I
( 1 8
I
t
1
E
F
G
H
3 2
3 3
4 1
35
36
44
45
.
4 2
h
i
:
I
52
53
k
I
55
5 6
6 4
6 5
3
4
5
6
m
n
N
62
- -
16
( 63
0
D
72
73
8 1
82
83
9 1
92
93
1 3
r
75
76
84
85
86
94
95
96
1 6
0
S
S
T
U
V
t
U
W
X
X
Y
Z
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION CONFIGURATION
lark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs. (Make copies of the pages to provide additional records if needed.
Mditional records may be needed when add-on expansion modules are employed to extend the station capacity of a base unit.)
Dial the feature
and then dial the selection code or press the
button to program the selection.
When a
action is
A current
provided
setting is indicated
a lighted LED next to the programming button for that selection.
y a sing/e button, the lighted LED indicates an active feature. When programming without
a
console, repeat the procedure to disable
a
at a keypad selected station.
Station port selection is made by dialing a selection number on the keypad per the following reference chart.
KEYPAD BUTTONS
STA
1 0 - 5 7
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Base Level: The first step In any
programming sequence is to
Press
Dial
7 4 6
the
base level. Once in this mode, any
desired configuration can be set.
1. Dial
2. Dial
“STATION DEFAULT
station ports system-wide.
Statlon Default: The station
configuration features, described in the
to
following procedures, can be defaulted to
a standard
Of
These
will provide satisfactory system
performance in a broad range of site
applications.
Station
4. Dial
57: Dial 10
for additional stations to default.
57.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
1. Dial 52.
“ACCESS CODE
Flexlble Station Numberlng: The
supports a flexible station
2. Dial
3.
1
to assign Ext no. “ASSIGN EXT. NUM.”
numbering plan for calling individual
stations and departments. Each station
be programmed to respond to the
of any available number between
10 and 7999; however, the same dialing
cannot be assigned as both a
station extension number and a
department access code, nor will the
system allow an extension number or
access code conflict such as 15 and
1500 to be assigned.
station number:
“EXT. xxxx
Dial10-57
“HT. xxxx
-Station
4. Dial new ext. number.
NO773 Extension number can be max. of four digits.
fess than four digits, leading zeros must be
before number.
Example: For
no.
dial 0015).
5. Select next station number and assign ext. no.
Dial
for configuration mode.
“ACCESS CODE
2. Dial 2 to assign access codes to
DFPARTMENT ACCESS CODF
1. Dial 52.
Department
Codes): Department access codes can
be programmed to be any number
(Access
41
DEFAULT
q
NOT AS’GND
“DEPT. CALLING
between 10 and 7999; however, the
same dialing code cannot be assigned
as both a station extension number and
a department access code nor will the
system allow an extension number
conflict such as 15 and 1500 to be
assigned. Further, with system defaultet
extension numbers, assigned
3. Dial
1
4 for dept. 1 4.
X
4. Dial new access code.
New code can be max. of four
less than digits,
be number. Code cannot
zeros must
conflict with station extension numbers.
5. Dial next department number and program
access code.
department access codes must
0058 or larger.
at
Dial
Dial
for next access code feature.
for configuration mode.
NOTE: See page 18 for line
assignment and page
4-3 for station assignment
Press SPKR to end.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
I
RECORD
PORT
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
I
“STATION FEATURES”
“EXEC. OVERRIDE
I. Dial 53
Dial 02.
ixecutlve Overrlde:
Selected stations
anbeprovidedwithbusyoverride. This
allowsthestationtooverridea
conditionatastation, sounda
rarning tone, and gain access to the
conversation.
Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
1. Dial
for next station feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
DEFAULT
q
NO
I
PORT ENTRY
“STATION FEATURES”
I. Dial 53
Dial 03.
Not Dlsturb (DND) Overrlde:
OVERRIDE
stationscanbeprovidedwith
overridecapability.Thiscapability 3. Select station ports to be programmed:
the station to override a do not
conditionandringastation
inthatmode.
Station 10
Dial for next station feature.
57: Dial 10
57.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Executive override, as
above, is
I
18
enabled when DND
override is programmed. Also
refer to
on page 4-8.
inhibit procedure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
“STATION FEATURES”
“VOICE BLOCK
Dial 53.
2. Dial 04.
Announce Blocklng: This
a station user to block voice
intercom signalling.
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Dial
for next station feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
I
40
41
I
24
25
I
I
56
57
I
DEFAULT
NOT ASSIGNED
PQ
42
“STATION FEATURES’
SPD TOLL
ENTRY
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial
System Speed Dlal Toll Restrlctlon:
When this feature is enabled, previously
programmed toll restriction tables that
are assigned to a station are applied to
system speed dial calls when they are
made from the station.
I
10
6
I
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
57: Dial 10 57.
Station 1 0
4. Dial
for next station feature.
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
32
33
Dial
for configuration mode.
I 34
35
I
19
20
I
I
I
36
37
38
I
I
23
24
25
39
40
I 41
I
I
I 5567
I
DEFAULT
q
NOT ASSIGNED
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Walt Orlglnate: A station that
programmedwiththisfeaturecan
the message waiting light at
in the system.
# 7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
“STATION FEATURES”
I. Dial 53.
Dial 06.
“MSG. WAIT
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station
57: Dial 10 57.
Dial for next station feature.
This feature must be
at a station that is
Dial
for configuration mode.
designated as a central
message desk per the
procedure below.
“STATION FEATURES”
D E S K
to be programmed:
1. Dial 63.
2. Dial 08.
3. Select station
Message Desk:One station in
system can be designated as the
messagedeskandbearranged
exclusive messaging waiting control.
hisstationmusthavemessagewait
enabledinordertocontrol
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
4. Dial fornextstationfeature.
nessage waiting light at another station
Dial
forconfigurationmode.
34
35
36
37
18
19
20
21
VOTE: This station will also have the
message wait
feature,
as detailed above,
automatically enabled when
the central message desk
feature is enabled.
2
38 39
40
41
24
25
I
I
57
DEFAULT
NOT ASSIGNED
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
line
Preference: A ringing
“RING
ill automatically be answered when a
is taken off-hook.
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10
57: Dial 10
57.
4. Dial
for next station feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
“STATION FEATURES”
“SERVICE OBSERVE
be arranged so that they cannot be
observed.
Dial 10 57.
57:
for next station feature.
Station 10
4. Dial
Executive override, as detailed
on page 4-24, is automatically
enabled when the service
Dial
for configuration mode.
observing feature is enabled.
“STAT/ON FEATURES”
“UNOBSERVABLE
3.
station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
4. Dial
Dial
for next station feature.
for configuration
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Hold: With this feature
# 7 4 6 for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
Dial 53.
“STATION FEATURES”
pressing another line button
already on a line call will
“AUTO HOLD
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
2. Dial 11.
place this existing call on
told.
4. Dial
for next station feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
I 41
I
I 57
I
DEFAULT
NOT ASSIGNED
“STATION FEATURES”
AUTO HOLD”
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Hold For Intercom: With this 1. Dial 53.
feature enabled, pressing another
intercom button or line button while
already on an intercom call will
automatically place this existing call on
hold.
2. Dial 12.
4. Dial
for next station feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
“STATION FEATURES”
“HEADSET MODE
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 13.
ieadset Interface: A station port can be
to allow headset operation.
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
4. Dial
for next station feature.
I
I
I
Dial
for configuration mode.
49
33
I
I
51
52
I
36
I
I
I
I
I
I
55
39
I
I
I
5 7
I
25
I
41
DEFAULT
NOT ASSIGNED
I
Personal Rlnglng Tones: A station can
programmed to
in one of four
distinctive tones:
3. Select ringing tone.
Dial for tone 1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
16 Hz warble
“RINGING TONE 1
“RINGING TONE 2
“RINGING TONE 3
“RINGING TONE 4
1
18 Hz warble
23 Hz warble
23 Hz warble
Dial 2 for tone 2.
Dial 3 for tone 3.
Dial 4 for tone 4.
4. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Dial
Press
Press
for next ringing tone assignment.
for next station feature.
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
“GRP. CALL PICKUP”
4. Dial 1 -4forgp. -4
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
6. Dial
for next group
Dial
for next station feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
NOTE: To
station
group, assign
to group 0.
“STATION FEATURES”
Hunt Group: Stations can be
HUNT LINK
to ring.
4. Select second linking station
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Disable a link, if desired, by linking
a station to itself.
6. Dial
Example
7. Dial
for another link
16 to 17, 17 to 18, and 18 to 16.)
next station feature.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Department Calllng: Stations
can be grouped by department to allow a
call to search for an idle station within a
department if a busy or RNA is
encountered at a called station. There
can be up to four departments with up to
16 stations in each one. One additional
station can be placed in each
department to serve as a termination
station. Calls that roll to a termination
station will follow a call forward if it is set
at that station.
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
“STATION FEATURES”
“DEPT. CALLING
“DEPARTMENT X
4.
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 19.
3. Dial 1
4. Select department stations:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Dial
DRT ENTRY PORT ENTRY
0
1
2
I
26
I
I
I
I
27
I
43
44
45
46
47
4 for dept.
8
9
3
30
5
6
7
3 1
to program next department.
I
I
6. Dial 5
8 for termination station in dept. 1
4.
33
49
I
“DEPARTMENT X
7. Select termination station:
Station 10
8. Dial
station..
57: Dial 10
57.
to program next department termination
NOTE: See page
18 for
Dial
Dial
for next station feature.
for configuration mode.
line assignments and
‘ 5
I 41
I
57
I
I
page 4-23 for department
access code assignemnt.
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 20.
“STATION FEATURES”
Audlble Monltorlng: The
multiline station provides a visual
at a
MONITOR
indication of idle, busy and line ringing
status of monitored stations. Audible
indication of direct and delayed ringing
can be provided for selected stations if
the visual indications are program
enabled (refer to system configuration
“station monitoring” procedure on page
4-9).
3. Dial 1 for no audible monitoring. “NONE
4. Dial 2 for direct ring
“DIRECT RING
“DELAYED RING
monitoring.
5. Dial 3 for delayed ring
monitoring.
6. Select stations for programming:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
7. Dial
Dial
next monitoring condition.
for next station feature.
for configuration mode.
‘4
I
I
56
57
I
Dial
41
q
ASSIGNED
Press SPKR to end.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
DESCRIPTION
r
I
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 21.
3. Dial 0
“STATION FEATURES”
“CALL FWD RNA
PORT ENTRY
C
Forward On
No
(RNA): Call forwarding of busy,
ring-no answer calls to a particular
can be automatic. As such, it
those calls to any idle station
either by intercom hunt group
by department with the called station.
this feature to arrange for calls to
rapidly through such associated
testing each one in turn with
rings.
a
9 for 0
9 rings before forwarding.
X
4. Select stations for which calls will be
forwarded after selected number of rings:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
a
1
5. Dial
for additional station ring assigments.
5 1
Dial
for next station feature.
I
36
37
38
39
40
4 1
52
53
54
55
Dial
for configuration mode.
I
VOTE:
program the system
intercom
for the
as tone
choice.
See page 4-8.
NO ASSIGNED
“STATION FEATURES”
DEPARTMENTS”
Message
Departments: Selected station!
Account
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 22.
!
be arranged together making it
3. Dial 0 for no SMDA dept. assigned.
12
13
14
28
29
30
44
45
46
for an SMDA
to be
“DEPARTMENT
I
which will only include
nformation concerning that specific
arrangement.
i
!
“DEPARTMENT X
4. Dial
1
8 for dept 1 8.
5. Select stations for SMDA department:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
NOTE: Also assign SMDA
6. Dial
for additional department/station
numbers. See page
assigments.
Dial
Dial
for next station feature.
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Off-Hook Voice Announce
Dlsable: The SOHVA feature
standard for every digital telephone
The feature can be disabled with
his programming selection.
# 7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
“STATION FEATURE5
1. Dial 53
2. Dial 24
.
“SECURE OHVA
3. Select station port for programming
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Dial
for next station feature.
3 2
33
34
48
4 9
Dial
for configuration mode.
I
I
25
I
DEFAULT SOHVA ENABLED AT ALL STA.
“STATION FEATURES
“SOHVA GROUP
“SOHVA GROUP X
Secure Off-Hook
Announce
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 30.
(SOHVA) Groups: Arrange the ability of
a station port to originate and/or receive
SOHVA calls by assigning SOHVA
calling groups to station ports. Certain
station ports can be arranged together
for SOHVA calling between one another
while other station ports in the system
are excluded from this group. Eight
different fixed-configuration SOHVA
groups are provided by the system.
3. Dial
1
6 for gp. 1-8.
4. Select all station ports to receive SOHVA
-Station 10 57: Dial 10 57
and repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional
SOHVA group/station assignments
5. Dial
33
34
35
4 9
50
5 1
1 8
1 9
Dial
Dial
for next station feature
for configuration mode.
NO GROUPS AS’GND
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
Port: While port is active
PORT! ENTRY
I. Dial 53.
Dial 26.
“STATION FEATURES*
“DATA SECURE PORT”
nacall, thisfeaturepreventsany
tonesassociatedwithother
3. Select station
for programming:
ystemfeaturesfrominterruptingthecall
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Dial for next station feature.
Dial
forconfigurationmode.
153 I
54
55
I
!
21
23
3 9
24
25
40
41
56
57
DEFAULT
NONE ASSIGNED
“STATION FEATURES”
“LCD CALL COST”
3. Select station ports for programming:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
ENTRY
ENTRY PORT ENTRY
I. Dial 63.
Dial 27.
Speakerphone Dlsplay of Costed
When call costing is being
with the system, an LCD
canbeprogrammedto
1 1
the cost of a call as it Is made
mmthestation.
Dial for next station feature.
Dial
forconfigurationmode.
37
36
3 9
40
41
53
54
55
56
57
22
23
24
25
DEFAULT NOT ASSIGNED
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6
for base level.
I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
DESCRIPTION
iystem Alarm Report Station: When
system has been arranged to report
use this programming feature to
stations to display the alarm
eports when the station user takes
action.
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 28.
3. Select station ports for programming:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
“STATION FEATURES”
“ALARM RECEIVE
44
45
46
1 2
1 3
1 4
28
29
30
4. Dial
for next station feature.
156
I
I
312
I
I
A
7R
I
I
Dial
for configuration mode.
enable system alarm
reporting. See page
10.
25
I 41
I
I 57
I
I
DEFAULT
q
NOT ASSIGNED
“PAGING”
1. Dial 55.
and Zone Paglng: Stations can
voice announcements through
he telephone speaker, or through an
paging speaker connected to a
port, and transmit voice
42
43
44
10
11
26
77
28
2. Choose paging assignment.
Dial for zone 1 originate. “ORIGINATE ZONE
Dial 2 for zone 2 originate. “ORIGINATE ZONE 2”
Dial 3 for zone 3 originate “ORIGINATE ZONE 3”
1
with the telephone
“ALL-CALL
Dial 4 for all-call originate.
Dial 5 for zone 1 receive
Dial 6 for zone 2 receive
Dial 7 for zone 3 receive
Dial 8 for all-call receive.
Announcements can be made
o certain areas of the system or to all
in the system.
“RECEIVE ZONE 1”
“RECEIVE ZONE 2”
“RECEIVE ZONE 3”
“ALL-CALL
19
20
35
36
37
5 1
5 2
53
A button can be assigned
a
Dial 9 to clear all assignments. “CLEAR PAGING” 2 1
station for paging access per the
procedure shown on page 4-45.
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10
57: Dial 10
57
4. Dial
to assign other paging.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
# 7 4 6
for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
REFERENCE RECORD
I. Dial 53.
Dial 15.
“STATION FEATURES” MARK STATION/LINE RECORD
PAGE 4 40
Llne (also prlme group or prime
A preprogrammed group of
ines, an intercom line, or one individual
ine can be designated to a particular
where it is automatically selected
or use when that station is taken
DEFAULT NONE ASSIGNED
“PRIME LINE
Assign prime line.
“PRIME
XX
-14orpressAl -A14
Press HOLD then press Al
A6
“PRIME L/NE GRP X
“PRIME INTERCOM
Assign prime group,
Dial 51-54 for gps. l-4.
Assign prime intercom,
Dial
for intercom line.
1. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Dial
for next prime line, group, or
intercom assignment.
Press
Press
for next station feature.
for next station feature
Rlnglng
I. Dial 54.
Dial 1.
MARK STATION/LINE RECORD ON PAGE 4 40
DEFAULT ALL LINES DIRECT RING AT
STATION PORTS 10 AND 17
Flexlble Rlnglng Asslgnments:
assignments are programmed on a per
station/per line basis. Ringing is
“DIRECT RING
3. Select line ports for direct ringing:
controlled for every line that has
Line port 1-14 Dial 01 14 or press Al Al4
Line port 15, 16
Line port 17 24 Dial 17 24
appearance at a station. Immediate, or
direct, ringing can be assigned to some
lines and delayed ringing to others.
Dial
or press
,
Press HOLD then press Al
when all line ports are selected.
Select station ports to be programmed:
A6
NOTE: Do not program direct ringing
for lines that are assigned to
direct department calling.
Dial
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
See page
18.
Dial
Dial
Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line ringing assignment
for configuration mode.
Continued on next page
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
EATURE DESCRIPTION
Ringing Asslgnments
EFERENCE RECORD
Dial 2.
“DELAY RING
Select line ports for delayed ringing:
Line port
Line port
= Dial 01 14 or press Al Al4
= Dial
or press
B2.
Press HOLD then press Al
A6
Dial # when all line ports are selected.
Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Dial
Dial
Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line ringing feature.
for configuration mode.
STATION/LINE-RECORD
PAGE 4 40
Transfer (of rlnglng): The
can place the system into the
light transfer (of ringing) mode of
While in this mode of
I. Dial 64.
Dial 3.
3. Select line ports:
DEFAULT ALL LINES NIGHT RING AT
STATION PORTS 10 AND 17
Line
1-14 = Dial 01 14 or press Al
Al4
A8
special line/station ringing
are active. These
Line port 15, 16 = Dial
Line port 17
or press
24
24 = Dial 17
are programmed per this
Press HOLD then press Al
Dial # when all line ports are selected.
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
refer
night transfer
(of ringing) on page 4-75.
Station 10
57: Dial 10
57.
6. Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line feature.
for-configuration mode.
Dial
Dial
Press SPKR to err
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
DESCRIPTION
1. Dial 54.
MARK STATION/LINE RECORD ON PAGE
DEFAULT ALL LINES PRIVATE
4
40
Release: A line can be made
Ion-private at a particular station while
emaining private at all other stations.
can be programmed to
2. Dial 4.
3. Select line ports:
-140rpressAl -A14
Line port 15, 16 = Dial 15, 16 or press
release privacy while on
lines. With this arrangement,
stations can join that particular
whenever it is on the privacy
elease line.
Press HOLD then press Al A6
4. Dial when all line ports are selected.
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
6. Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line feature.
for configuration mode.
Dial
Dial
1. Dial 64.
Denied: Access to particular
ines can be denied to certain stations. A 2. Dial 5.
user cannot select a denied line.
3. Select line ports:
Line port 1-14 Dial 01 14 or press Al Al4
Line port 15, 16 = Dial or press
Line port 17 24 Dial 17 24
Press HOLD then press Al A6
4. Dial # when all line ports are selected.
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
6. Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line feature.
for configuration mode.
Dial
Dial
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6
for base level.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
MARK STATION/LINE RECORD ON PAGE 4-40
Orlglnatlon
The ability to
1. Dial 54.
2. Dial 6.
DEFAULT
NO ORIG. RESTRICTIONS
calls on certain lines can be
“ORIGINATION DENY”
denied to individual stations. The ability
o answer incoming calls on these lines
still allowed.
3. Select line ports:
Line port l-14 = Dial 01 14 or press Al
Line port 15, 16 = Dial 15, or press
Line port 17 24 = Dial 17 24
Al4
B2.
Press HOLD then press Al A8
when all line ports are selected.
4. Dial
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
6. Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line feature.
for configuration mode.
Dial
Dial
MARK STATION/LINE RECORD ON PAGE 4-40
DEFAULT NONE ASSIGNED
Idle Llne Preference: With idle line
enabled, taking a station
1. Dial 64.
2. Dial 7.
will automatically connect it to
3. Select line ports:
assigned and idle line programmed
this purpose.
Line
Line port
l-14
Dial 01 14 or press Al Al4
= Dial or press
Press HOLD then press Al A8
when all line ports are selected.
4. Dial
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
6. Dial
Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line feature.
for configuration mode.
Dial
Press SPKR to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System
66-083
STATION/LINECONFIGURATIONRECORD
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
SEE CHART ON PAGE
Jon-Square System: Every
49
I
buttons at each digital
can be assigned individually
mapped) to select any line assigned to
hat station or to provide other functions.
buttons can be assigned as direct
select (DSS) buttons to provide
access to system stations or
as idle to provide
for station the user. Idle buttons
as dynamic line buttons. These
allow the system to temporarily
a line appearance to a station
normally does not have that line
assigned to it. That line will appear at a
line button. While the line is in
appearance there, any normal call
operations can be performed.
to
on page 4-50 for
locations.
“BUTTON MAPPING
“BUTTON DEFAULT
3. Select station ports to be defaulted:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Button Asslgnments
1. Dial 56.
Dial 01.
3. Dial
for next button mapping feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Llnes To Buttons
1. Dial 56.
2. Dial 02.
“BUTTON MAPPING
“ASSIGN LINE
3. Select button to be programmed:
Press Al A14,
B8.
Select line ports to be assigned.
Line port 1-14 = Dial 01 14 or Press Al A14.
Line port 17 24 = Dial 17 24.
.
Press SPKR to end.
Press HOLD then press Al A8.
Lines To Buttons
Continued
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all
are assigned.
on next page
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
# 7 4 6 for base level.
Pr
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
DESCRIPTION
To Buttons continued
SEE CHART ON PAGE 4-49
6. Dial # to finish button mapping.
7. Select station port to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
I
8. Dial
for further line/button assignment.
for next button mapping feature.
for configuration mode.
Dial
Dial
“BUTTON MA
ASSIGN
SelectlonToButtons 1. Dial 56.
2. Dial 03.
3. Select button to be programmed:
Press Al A14,
4. Select station port to be assigned:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all ports are assigned.
6. Dial #.
7. Select station ports to be programmed
with this
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
8. Dial for further
assignment:
assignment.
Dial
Dial
for next button mapping feature
for configuration mode.
.
.
MAPPING
Blank Buttons For User Autodlal and
LineButtons
NOTE When blanking but t ons, be
sure a previous/y assigned
1. Dial
2. Dial 04.
3. Select all buttons to be programmed:
Press Al A14,
button is
(feature not
4. Dial #.
selected by user) before it is
blanked
5. Select station ports to be programmed with
this auto dial button assignment.:
- Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
6. Dial
for further button blanking.
for next button mapping feature.
for configuration mode.
-
-
O
R
Dial
Dial
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Intercom Button: Stations can
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
Dial 55.
“BUTTON MAPPING
“ASSIGN
SEE CHART ON PAGE 4-49
I
programmed to provide a second
button.
2. Dial 05.
3. Select button to be programmed:
Press Al
4. Select station ports to be programmed
with multiple intercom button:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Dial
for further intercom button assignment
for next button mapping feature.
for configuration
-OR-
Dial
Dial
1. Dial 55.
2. Dial 05.
MAPPING
Button: Stations can be
to provide a privacy button.
“ASSIGN
4 user engaged in a
call can
3. Select button to be programmed:
Press Al A14, B6.
4. Select station ports to be programmed
with a PRIVACY button:
the privacy button to change the
call into a non-private one.
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Dial
for further privacy button assignment.
for next button mapping feature.
for configuration mode.
Dial
Dial
Press SPKR to end.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
Group Queue Button: A station
can queue for a busy line by
1. Dial 66.
2. Dial 15.
3. Select button to be programmed:
“BUTTON MAPPING
“ASSIGN GRP Q”
SEE CHART ON PAGE 4-49
I
a
button that is programmed as
he line group queue button.
-Press Al A14,
4. Select station ports to be programmed
with QUEUE button:
Station
5. Dial
57: Dial 10
for next line group queue
57.
button assignment.
Dial
Dial
for next button mapping feature
for configuration mode..
1. Dial 66.
2. Dial 17.
3. Select button to be programmed:
MAPPING” SEE CHART ON PAGE 4-49
“ASSIGN ACCT KEY
Code Button: Press the
I
code button and then dial an
code to record a call into a
without interrupting
Press Al A14,
B6
the call.
4. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Dial for further ACCOUNT CODE
button assignment.
Dial
-OR-
Dial
for next button mapping feature.
for next configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Programming
66-083
NON
SQUARE SYSTEM REFERENCE RECORD
(Copy this chart for additional record space if add-on expansion modules are included with the system).,
IA4
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
STA:
I
DEFAULT
B8
1
8, and Al 21, A2 19, A3 17, A4 1 5 ,
1 3 , A6
1 1 ,
A7 9, A8 22, A9 20,
All 16, Al2 14, Al3 1 2 . Al4
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION
(Copy This Record Sheet As Required
Additional Stations)
ED
STATION
STATION LOCATION
A6
A9
A10
All
Al2
Al3
Al4
A3
A4
A6
A7
LCD Speakerphone
A6
A9
A10
All
Al2
Al3
Al4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
PROGRAMMED BUTTON FUNCTION
code on button chart)
.... ........ .....
.
Blank
Lnn................... Line 01
Snn .................. Station
24
57
............... D o not disturb
PRI ................... Privacy
................... Second intercom
ACC ................. Account code
SAV.. ................ Save
Speakerphone
10x14
B6
.................. Zone page 1 - 3
.................. All-call page
................. Automatic call back
Monitor Telephone
B6 cl 10x14
CF
.................... Call forward
.................. Call park orbii 1 - 9
.................. Line group l-4
.................. Voice announce block
TGQ
................. Line group queue
Telephone Faceplate
On
Flgure 4-l. Locatlon Of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6
for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
.
.
.
26
27
.
.
.
Y
PORT FNTRY.
42
43
.
Dial 57 to re-assign station to port.
“ASSIGN
Dial station extension number.
itatlon-to-Statlon Port Reasslgnment:
extension number and all other
attributes of a station that
1
7999.
initially assigned to a particular port
PORT XX
be reassigned to a different
by
Dial physical port number
57.
action. This feature allows
adds, moves, and changes to be made
relocating the station wiring.
“LOGICAL STA XX
1. Dial
i. Dial
to make assignment.
for configuration mode.
51
NOTE; Refer
automatic station
on page
station connections
I
52
53
54
55
and
1
I
discussion found on page 3-6.
Remember, the station
to station
cannot be reassigned.
I 39
I
40
4 1
I
156
57
24
25
I
I
assignment
DEFAULT
LOGICAL SAME AS PHYSICAL
10 STA 10, ETC.)
I
MODEL STATION
BLOCKED STATIONS
I. Dial 56.
Block Programmlng: A configuration
Select model station port:
assigned to
a
particular station can be
assigned to one other station or to an
entire block of stations with one
Station 10 57 = dial 10 57.
“MODELSTA XX
programming
action.
3. Dial first station port in block (dial code as above
4. Dial
5. Dial last station port in block (dial code as above
6. Dial #.
7. Dial
for further block programming.
for configuration mode.
Dial
first, last and all
ports in
will be
programmed
mode/
To
program an individual station port, select
and last port to be the same number. [For example: 25,
programs station 26 as 25
first
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for
level.
I
REFERENCE RECORD
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
“DISABLE
!. Select station ports to be disabled.
I. Dial 59.
Dlsable: Station
on a per station basis.
can be
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
Dial
for configuration mode.
23
24
25
39
40
41
55
56
57
DEFAULT NO STATIONS DISABLED
Press SPKR to end.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIRECTINWARDSTATIONDIALING(DISD)
he
feature allows an external party to call an intercom station directly without assistance by the attendant. The
call must be received
n a line which has been specially programmed to allow this feature. Any line can be programmed to be a
peration and the night transfer (of ringing) mode of operation.
line for both the normal mode of
he number of rings which occurs on a
all to be serviced in a regular manner by stations that have a line appearance for the
line before it is answered is programmable.
By setting a large number of rings, time is allowed for a
line. Setting the number of rings to 0 disables the line
If a line is to be dedicated for
umber to be dialed is programmable as is the
use, it is a good practice to set it for one ring. The amount of time allowed for an extension
assist station that will answer calls that are not completed during this dial time limit.
is recommended that a music source be connected to the system to provide a reassurance to the caller during a camp-on situation when the
feature is being used.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Base Level: The first step in any
Press
Dial
7 4 6
sequence is to enter the
level. Once in this mode, any
configuration can be set.
Tlme
When extension
1. Dial 44.
TIME X
TIME
12
12 SEC
I
15
9
q
number dialing is not completed within
the programmed dial time limit, a
is routed to the assist station if one
is programmed; otherwise, the line is
dropped.
2. Press program button to select dial time limit:
Dial 1 or press Al = 6 sec.
DEFAULT
Dial 2 or press A2 = 9 sec.
Dial 3 or press A3 = 12 sec.
Dial 4 or press A4 = 15 sec.
3. Press
for configuration mode.
1. Dial 45.
lncomlng Rings: The number of
RINGS
rings which occurs on a
line
2. Press program button to choose operating mode
Dial 1 or press Al
before it is answered is programmable.
Setting a large number of rings allows
time for a call to be serviced in a
normal mode.
-OR-
RINGS DAY X
regular manner by stations that have
- Dial 2 or press A2 = night transfer
line appearance for the
such action is desired.
line if
(of ringing) mode.
3. Select rings to occur before line is answered.
RNGS NITE
Dial 0 for no rings. This disables
for line.
Dial 1 9 rings 1
9
(LED On lines assigned to number of rings).
Continued
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6
for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
INCOMING RINGS
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
Incoming Ring Continued
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
Dial # then assign line pork to ring number.
Line port 14 = Dial -14 or Press Al Al4
DEFAULT 0 RINGS
Line port
Dial 15, I6 or Press BI,
Line
Press HOLD then press AI
assignment.
A8
4. Press
and repeat steps 2 and 3
for further
Press
for configuration mode.
1. Dial 46.
ASSIST
DAY
Statlon: When extension
lumber dialing is not completed within
,he programmed dial time limit, the call
2. Choose operating mode to be programmed:
Dial I or press AI
normal mode.
DEFAULT STA IO DAY AND NIGHT
s routed to the
assist station.
ASSIST DAY X
-OR-
- Dial ‘2 or press A2
(of ringing) mode.
assist station.
night transfer
ASSIST
3.
Dial
for no station (line drops after timeout).
-OR-
- Dial IO
67 to select
assist station.
(LED On
lines assigned to assist station).
Dial
Line
then assign line to assist station.
1
14 = Dial
-14 or Press Al
Al4
B2
Line port 15, 16 = Dial 15, I6 or Press
Line
17 24 = Dial 17
24
-OR-
Press HOLD then press AI
and repeat steps 2 and 3
A8
4. Press
for further assist station programming.
-OR-
Press
for configuration mode.
1
Press SPKR to end.]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANALOGTERMINALINTERFACE
The Analog Terminal Interface
device is an optional accessory available for use with the digital telephone system.
Connect it to a station port to
interfacing for such external telephony equipment as an ExecuMail system, an industry-standard model 2500 tone dial telephone, a model 500
dial telephone, etc. Perform the following programming actions as necessary when operating external equipment through the
device.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Transfer of
When ExecuMail Is included with the
system, use this programming feature
to arrange for a immediate line transfer
without delay from ExecuMail to a
station port.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
MAIL AUTO
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable.
Mall:
1. Dial 25
(LED On
Enable)
Dial
1
to enable.
(Al LED is on)
Dial 2 to disable.
3. Dial
for configuration mode
Mall Llne ID: When ExecuMail
is included with the system, program
the lines with identification (ID)
numbers. These numbers allow the
ExecuMail system to identify which line
it is answering. The ID numbers that
are assigned here must match the ID
numbers that are selected as part of
ExecuMail system programming.
“VOICE MAIN LN ID”
2. Select line port (LED On = Line assigned)
Line 1-14 Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al4
Line port 15, 16 Dial or press
Line port 17-24 = Dial 17
1. Dial 43.
24
Press HOLD then press Al A8
3. Dial #to clear current ID.
4. Dial ID number (8 digit maximum).
5. Dial
for further ID assignment.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY PORT! ENTRY! PORT!
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
“STATION FEATURES”.
XFR ON
I. Dial 53.
Dial 31.
Mall Transfer on Busy: When
is included with the system,
3. Select station ports to be programmed.
Station ports 10 57: Dial 10 57
for next feature.
busy station may need to be alerted if
he
system is attempting a
transfer to it instead of having the
automatically routed to a voice mail
This program feature allows a
Dial
Dial
for configuration mode.
station (usually the attendant station) to
programmed for this option.
(DEFAULT
I
ENTRY! PORT!
PORT! ENTRY
“STATION FEATURES”
DIALING”
1. Dial 53.
Thru
Connect external
Dial 07.
2.
telephony equipment to a station port
through the Analog Terminal Interface
device.
With this programming feature enabled,
DTMF signalling tones, generated by
the external equipment, pass through
3. Select station ports to be programmed
Station 57: Dial 10 57
4. Dial for next feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
the
device, the common equipment
and any line connection. This feature
is automatically enabled when the
device is connected to the station port.
It is used by connected equipment
such as the
system or a
model 2500 industry-standard
telephone. Disable this feature for
equipment such as rotary-dial
telephones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
PC
“STATION FEATURES”
“VOICE MAIL PORT
3. Select station ports to be programmed
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57
4. Dial fornext feature.
Mall Port: Connect the
system or a model 2500
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 32.
industry-standardtelephonetoa
station
throughtheAnalog
Terminal Interface
device.
Use this programming feature to
enable the station port for
operation(voicemailport).Disablethe
station port as a voice mail port when
used for model 2500 telephone
operation.
Dial
for configuration mode.
NOTE: This feature is
disabled if the
device is
with a
telephone at the programmed
station port.
I
41
I
25
I
DEFAULT
NOT ENABLED
“STATION FEATURES”
Dlstlnctlve Rlnglng: Intercom
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 33.
ON
calls that ring at equipment connected
3. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
through an
devicehaveadifferent
cadence than outside calls have.
Intercom ring cadence is: 1 sec. on, 0.5
sec. off, 1 sec. on, 3.5 sec. off.
(LED On
Enable)
RING ON
4. Dial
1
to Enable.
Outside call
cadence is: 2 sec. on,
(Al LED on)
4 sec. off. Disable this distinctive.
tinging feature to make the intercom
ring cadence the same as that for
outside calls.
RING OFF
Dial 2 to Disable.
5. Dial fornextfeature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE CONFIGURATION
Before programming the toll restriction configuration, enter the toll restriction requirements on the programming reference tables found at the end of this
procedure.
In order for toll restriction to take effect, the following three-fold process must occur.
l
l
l
One or more toll tables must be entered
Toll tables must be assigned to
appropriate lines.
Toll tables must be assigned to all appropriate stations.
the toll tables are programmed, they must then be assigned to both a line and a station using that line before any programmed toll restriction will be
activated at the station.
Typically, this includes access codes which result in toll charges,
1. Determine the types of dialing restrictions which must be imposed on the system.
and certain local numbers as desired.
2. If the restricted dialing codes will be imposed consistently on most or all stations in the system, list them on one or two tables.
dialing restrictions is planned, spread the listing out across several tables.
If wide variation in the
3 . Strategically group the listings on the tables so that a list of restrictions can be applied to a particular station or group of stations.
4 . Designate each table as a DENY table or as an ALLOW table. The numbers entered in a DENY table are prevented from being dialed. ALLOW
tables take precedence over DENY tables. Therefore, an entry in an allow table will provide an explicit exception to an entry in a DENY table. Note
that the system always permits the dialing of any number not explicitly denied. Also, system speed dial numbers will not be toll restricted unless
specified by station COS programming.
Example A: Provide a simple and broad toll restriction format by creating a DENY table with two entries:
l
ENTRY (1)
Example
ENTRY (2) = 0. This format prevents all long distance and operator calls.
Prevent the dialing of all numbers within the (804) area code, while allowing the dialing of one specific number within that area code. by
entering 1804 in a DENY table and 18049782200 in an ALLOW table.
Press the # button in place of a particular digit to condense a range of numbers into one entry.
be included in an entry in either a DENY table or an ALLOW table.
The # character is a “match-anything” digit, and can
Example A: If
and 397 dialing is to be prohibited, list one entry of
on a DENY table to cover them all.
Example B: Since area codes typically have a 1 or a 0 as a middle digit, prevent long distance calls to those area codes by entering
in an DENY table.
and
8. Since it is important that emergency numbers never be restricted, always create an allow table with entries of 911 and 1911 to override any DENY
tables that have been created.
7. If the system is installed behind a PBX, include an access code as part of every table entry.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
Base Level: The first step in any
Press ITCM Dial
7 4 6
sequenceistoenterthe
level. Once in this mode, any
configurationcanbeset.
“DEFAULT TOLL
2. Press#todefaulttolltables.
Default:Two toll restriction
aredefaultedwith
1. Dial 70.
valuesandare
to the lines. They need
to be assigned to the stations to put
themintoeffect.Thedefaultedtables
bere-programmedwithdifferent
nformationusingthenormal
procedure.
Thepreprogrammedvaluesareas
follows:
TABLE
1 1
TABLE 2 (Allow)
1 1800
2 9 7 8 ’
3 411’
2 911
3
4
These values will provide satisfactory
system performance in a broad range of
site applications.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
# 7 4 6
for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
“TOLL TABLE
TABLE
INCLUDED AT END
1. Dial 71.
Table Entry:
2. Dial 01 16 or Press Al A14,
“XXXXX TABLE Y
for toll table 1
16.
3. Dial 5 or Press Al to establish an allow toll
“ALLOW TABLE Y
(Al LED on = allow)
Dial 6 or Press A2 to establish a deny toll table,
“DENY TABLE Y
(A2 LED on = deny)
4. Dial
1
4
or Press A8,
All for entry
number
1
4.
5. Dial #to clear current entry.
8. Dial keypad digits (0
9, #) to enter numbers.
...
7. Dial
for next entry and repeat steps 4
6 until
all table restrictions are entered.
8. Dial
for next table and repeat steps 2
for configuration mode.
7
until all tables are entered.
9. Dial
“ASSIGN TOLL-LINE”
1. Dial 72.
2.
Rsslgn Toll Table To Llne:
9
17
18
I
01 16 or Press Al A14,
for toll table 1 16.
3. Dial to finish entry and display lines.
I
12
1 3
14
15
20
5
4. Select line ports.
2 2
Line port 1-l 8 = Dial 01 14 or Press Al Al 4
I
Line port
Dial
or Press
Line port 17-24 = Dial 17
24
DEFAULT ALL TABLES AS’GND TO ALL PORTS
Press HOLD then dial Al A8
(LED On = Lines as’gnd to
to receive tables)
5. Dial
and repeat steps 2-4 for next toll table to
line assignment.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6
for base level.
I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
DESCRIPTION
“ASSIGN TOLL-STA.
16 for toll tables 1-16 to be as’gnd to sta
1. Dial 73.
2. Dial
Toll Table To Station
Press Al A14,
(LED On = Selected table)
3. Dial # to finish entry.
B2 for tables l-16.
4. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57.
5. Dial for next toll table to station assignment.
Dial
for configuration mode.
“ASSIGN TOLL-NITE”
1. Dial 74.
Toll Table to be applied when
10
11
12
26
27
42
43
44
is programmed by the attendant 2. Dial 01 16 for toll tables 1 16 to be as’gnd.
or night transfer of ringing.
Press Al A14,
for tables 1-16.
(LED On = Selected table)
3. Dial #to finish entry.
4. Select station ports to be programmed:
Station 10 57: Dial 10 57 .
5. Dial for next toll table to night answer
assignment.
Dial
for configuration mode.
25
DEFAULT
I
q
NONE AS’GND
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Programming
66-083
Toll Restriction Programming Reference Tables
[TOLL RESTRICTION
TABLE
I
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE
TYPE: ALLOW DENY
I
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
TABLE ASSIGNMENT: LINES ALL STATIONS
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE
TYPE: ALLOW DENY
6
1
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE
TYPE: ALLOW
ENTRY ENTRY NUMBER
7
DENY
TABLE ASSIGNMENT: LINES
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE
STATIONS
I
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE
TYPE: ALLOW DENY
ENTRY ENTRY NUMBER
8
4
TYPE: ALLOW
DENY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System
66-083
Toll Restriction Programming Reference Tables continued
TOLL RESTRICTION T A B L E
9
TYPE: ALLOW
DENY
ENTRY
ENTRY NUMBER
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
12 13 14
1
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE
TYPE: ALLOW DENY
t ENTRY
T O L L R E S T R I C T I O N T A B L E
1
4
10
TYPE: ALLOW
DENY
ENTRY NUMBER (16 MAXIMUM)
ENTRY
ENTRY NUMBER 116
1
2
3
4
5
16
1
TOU RESTRICTION TABLE
TYPE: ALLOW
ENTRY
15
DENY
ENTRY NUMBER (16 MAXIMUM)
3
4
5
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE
1 2
I
NPE: AUOW
DENY
ENTRY NUMBER (16 MAXIMUM)
ENTRY
13 14 15 16
I
I
I
I
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DATA PRINTER SERVICE
When a data printer is connected to the system, the station message detail record (SMDR) for the system is printed automatically without any
programming or user intervention.
The data printer can also be commanded to print the configuration data for the system.
Partial or complete printouts can be obtained as desired.
When the printer is being used to print the configuration data or SMDA information, SMDR printout is temporarily halted. The SMDR data
collection is continued by the system during this time, but if more than two calls are logged for any one line, call records may be lost.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
Press ITCM. Dial 7 4 6
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Base Level: The first step In any
programming sequence is to enter the
base level. Once in this mode, the
printing of configuration data can be
commanded.
“PRINT
Enable data prlnter
1. Dial 91.
2. Choose configuration:
Dial to print all configuration data.
Dial 2 to system data.
1
“PRINT ALL
“PRINT SYSTEM
“PRINT LINES
“PRINT STATIONS
“PRINT STA.
Dial 3 to print line data.
,
Dial 4 to print data for all stations.
Dial 5 to print data for selected station.
Select station to be printed.
“PRINT STA. XXX
Dial
for stations 10
57.
Dial 6 to print toll restriction assignment.
Dial 7 to abort printing
“PRINT TOLL
“ABORT PRINT
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTEGRATED CALL COSTING
Call costing provides a means of establishing costing to be applied to outside calls made from system telephones.
Call costing computes charges for
a
call after it is completed. It does not restrict dialing as toll restriction does. The system provides several ways of establishing call costing. They are
as follows:
l
l
l
Area code band tables
Call rate tables
l
l
l
Exception tables
Zone call band tables
Call rate table of last resort
Office code band tables
With this range of costing methods, it is possible to apply reasonable rates for the entire country.
Call costing is applied to a dialed number as
described below. The call costing process is illustrated by the diagram shown in Figure 4-2.
1. EXCEPTION TABLES (LOCAL CALLS AND LONG DISTANCE CALLS)
All calls are first compared to entries in 4 exception tables (one entry per table). These tables provide the first orioritv level of costing.
The tables are
searched on a first match basis. This means that the first programmed entry that matches the call is the one that is used. A search is not made for the
best possible match. Matched calls are costed with values programmed into the call rate tables that are assigned to the exception tables. Use
exception tables to provide very specific exceptions to a bracket of calls similar to the following example.
Example: With all calls to area code 804 costed per a particular rate, make an exception for 804-555-1212 by programing exception table 1 with that
number. Since exception table entries are the highest priority, the values in the call rate table assigned to exception table 1 are applied to all calls
made to the 804-555-l 212 number.
2. OFFICE CODE BAND TABLES (LOCAL CALLS)
Calls that do not match exception tables are measured for the number of digits dialed. Calls with numbers that are have less than 10 digits (local calls)
are compared to entries in office code banding tables. Office code band tables are the second
level of costing for local calls.
They provide a
7 are associated
means of assigning local office codes into different bands and applying a separate call costing rate table to each band.
Bands 1
with call rate tables 18
24 respectively. Use office code band tables to cost calls made within a specific area code but to sites located at different
geographic distances from the calling location.
Example: A telephone company exchange consists of office codes 976,977, and 978.
Off ice code 976 is assigned to an outlying area while off ice
codes 977 and 978 are assigned to the heart of the city.
Assign 977 and 978 to one office code band table and 976 to another one.
Program a special
call costing rate for each banding table. Then, calls that are made to 976-nnnn are costed at a different rate than calls that are made to 977-nnnn or
3. ZONE CALL BAND TABLES (LONG DISTANCE CALLS)
In certain heavily populated geographic areas, different area codes exist within the same geographic distance, or zone, from the calling location.
these cases, use zone call band tables to cost calls based upon the zone, or geographic distance, from the caller.
I n
All calls that do not match exception tables are measured for the number of digits dialed. Those calls with numbers that have 10 digits or more (long
distance calls) are compared to entries in the zone call band tables. Zone call band tables are the second orioritv level of costing for long distance
calls. They provide a means of assigning office codes and corresponding area code into different zones and applying a separate call costing rate table
to each zone. Zone call band tables 1
4 are associated with call rate tables 25
28. A call must match both the office code and area code of an entry
before it is costed by a zone call band table.
Example: Zone 1 contains area code 203 with office codes 445 and 456.
It also contains area code 412 with office code 508. Zone 2 contains area
code 203 with office code 545. Zone 2 also contains area code 412 with office code 654. Zone 1 is costed at one rate and zone 2 is costed at another
rate. A call made to
l-41
or, l-41
is costed at a different rate than a call made to
or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. AREA CODE BAND TABLE (LONG DISTANCE CALLS)
Area
are
Long distance calls that do not match entries in zone call band tables are matched against area code band tables.
of
for long distance calls. Area code band tables 1
7 are associated with call rate costing tables
Use area code band
to one of seven different bands.
tables to cost calls based upon the area code of the called number.
Assign any or all area codes nnn (200-999)
Group area codes into bands based on frequently called areas, distance from the caller, or any other desired category.
Example: Assign area codes 703 and 804 to area code band table 1. Assign area code 415 to area code band table 7. Calls made to numbers such
as and are costed with values assigned to call rate table 11. calls made to numbers such as l-41 are
costed with values assigned to call rate table 17.
5. CALL RATE TABLES (LOCAL AND LONG DISTANCE CALLS)
Local calls and long distance calls that do not match entries in any exception table, office code band table, zone call band table or area code band
table are matched against entries in any call rate tables 2
33 and costed accordingly. This is the
level of costing for local calls and the
vel of
i-800-555-1 212 or
costing all calls).
for long distance calls. Call rate tables are also used to cost any calls that require special or extraordinary rates such as
a matching call rate table can not be found, calls are costed by call rate table 1 (the table of last resort for
l
A maximum of 16 digits can be programmed into each call rate table.
l
In programming a call rate table, select digits so that a particular dialed number or number group will be matched to a particular rate table. The
table with the best match to a dialed number is used by the system to cost the call.
l
l
Since a dialed number must match all of the digits that are programmed into a table to be considered a match,
into the table In place of a specific character to serve as a “match anything” digit.
a # character can be programmed
If a dialed number does not match all of the digits programmed into any call rate table, the system costs the call with the values programmed into
the call rate table of last resort (table 1).
6. DISCARD DIGITS
When the digital telephone system is installed behind a host system such as a PBX or
access codes must be dialed before obtaining an
outside line dial tone. These access codes should be removed so that calls are costed based on just the actual telephone numbers dialed.
different access codes entries with up to eight digits per entry can be programmed.
Up to six
Example: If the system is installed behind a PBX using a 9 as an outside line access code, program a 9 as the discard digit.
9-555-l 212 is dialed, the 9 is discarded and the call is costed based on 555-l 212.
When a number such as
7. DIALING TIME AND ANSWER TIME
Dialing time is not included when the time of a call is recorded for costing.
The amount of time that the system ignores for dialing purposes is
programmable. Plus, the system can be programmed to wait for a period of time before beginning to record costs for a call. This wait time allows a call
to ring and be answered before it is costed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System
D I S C A R D D I G I T S
1
C A L L
2
C O S T I N G
E X C E P T I O N
TABLES
3
2
3
O F F I C E
C O D E
B A N D
4
5
TABLES
C O S T
L
7
COMPUTED
C O S T
ASSOCIATED
C A L L R A T E
TABLES
2 5
C O M P U T E D
CALL RATE
TABLES
CALL RATE TABLE
3
O F
R E S O R T
AREA C O D E
B A N D T A B L E S
4
G E N E R A L C A L L
RATE TABLES
1 1
1 2
I
CALL RATE
1 3
TABLES FOR AREA
COMPUTED
C O D E B A N D S
1
1 5
1 6
1 7
TABLES
11.17
I
I
2 0
CALL RATE TABLES
F O R O F F I C E C O D E
2 1
I
2 2
23
I
2 4
I
I
N
O
I
1 2 5
C O S T
C O S T
COMPUTED
USING CAU
RATETABLEOF
R E S O R T
COMPUTED
USING ANY
MATCHED
CALL RATE
GENERALCALL
RATE TABLES
TABLE
T A B L E
2
33
Figure
Diagram
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
3ase Level:The first step in any
sequenceistoenterthe
level. Once in this mode, any
configurationcanbeset
1. Dial 78.
2. Dial 1 4 for entry 4.
“EXCEPTION
“ E N T R Y X
Tables:Calls are first
to entries in the call cost
tables to determine if a match
be made.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Dial
1
to assign the call rate table.
“CALL COST TBL XX”
I
I
4
I
I
I
4. Dial01 33 for call rate table number.
5. Dial
DEFAULT
8. Dial 2 to assign matching digits.
7. Dial toclearcurrententry.
8. Dial matching digits (16 max.
= match anything)
9. Dial
for next entry, and repeat steps 2 9 unti
all entries are made.
10. Dial
for configuration mode.
PROGRAMMING”
“COSTING BANDS
“OFFCE CODE BANDS”
“NO BAND
BAND
CODF
1. Dial 75.
2. Dial 01 to program
Code Band Tables (Local Calls)
Calls that do not match exception tables
are measured for the number of digits
dialed.Callswithnumbersthatarehave
less than digits (local calls) are
compared to entries in seven different
office code band tables. Program the
cost values for off ice code band tables in
costing bands.
3. Dial
1
to program
office code bands.
4. Dial 0 if no band is to
be as’gned.
DEFAULT NONE AS’GND
call rate tables 18
25.
“BANDX
7 for bands 1 7.
999 to as’gn office code.
Dial
1
5. Dial
8. Dial # and repeat step 5 for additional code.
7. Dial
8. Dial
and repeat steps 4-6 to program next band.
for next SMDA feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
AREA
CODE
OFFICE
CODE
PROGRAMMING”
“COSTING BANDS
“ZONE BANDS
BAND
1. Dial 75.
2. Dial 01 to program
costing bands.
3. Dial 3 to program
zone call bands.
4. Dial 0 if no zone is
to be as’gned.
!one Call Band Tables (Long
Calls that do not match exception
ables are measured for the number of
dialed. Those calls with numbers
hat have 10 digits or more (long
are compared to entries in four
zone call band tables. Program
he cost values for zone call band tables
2
n call rate tables 25
28.
“ZONEX
Dial 1 4 for zones 1 4.
5. Dial
999 to assign an area code.
3
6. Dial #.
7. Dial
999 to as’gn an office code.
Dial # and repeat step 7 for another office code.
4
9. Dial
and repeat steps 3-9 to add another area
code to same zone or to program next zone.
NONE AS’GND
10. Dial
for next SMDA feature.
for configuration mode.
Dial
PROGRAMMING”
AREA
1. Dial 75.
2. Dial
Area Code Band Table (Long
I
1
Calls): Long distance calls that do not
match entries in zone call band tables an
matched against seven different area
code band tables. Program the cost
values for area code band tables in call
to program
“COSTING BANDS
“AREA CODE BANDS”
“NO BAND
costing bands.
3. Dial 2 to program
area code bands.
4. Dial 0 if no band is
to be as’gned.
.
I
rate tables 11
17.
NONE AS’GND
“BAND
X
Dial
1
7 for bands 1 7.
6. Dial
999 to as’gn area code.
5. Dial
8. Dial
7. Dial
8
and repeat step 8 for additional code.
and repeat steps 3-6 to program next band
for next SMDA feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
1. Dial 76.
2. Dial table number (01 33).
“CALL COST TBL
CALL COSTING RECORDING TABLES
SHOWN ON NEXT PAGES
Tables (Local And Long
Distance Calls): Local calls and long
calls that do not match entries ir
“CALL COST TBL XX”
to enter matching digits.
EXAMPLE TABLE:
any exception table, office code band
zone call band table or area code
table are matched against entries ir
3. Dial
1
NOTE: Cal Cost
4. Dial #to clear previous digits.
5. Dial matching digits for costed number (32 max.
not accept
digits.
rate tables 2
10 and 29
33 and
accordingly. Call rate tables are
also used to cost calls that are matched i
the office code band tables, zone call
band tables, area code band tables, and
any calls that require special or
#
match anything digit). “XXXXXXXX
6. Dial
7. Dial 2 then dial 01
tenths of minutes.
to end matching digits.
99 for
1 time in
rates. If a matching call
“TIER 1
XX
rate table can not be found, calls are
costed by call rate table 1 (the table of
last resort for costing all calls).
8. Dial
9. Dial 3 then dial 001
999 for Tier 1 rate in cents.
“TIER 1 RATE XXX
10. Dial
band tables call rate tables 18 25
11. Dial 4 then dial 001 999 for Tier 2 rate in cents.
“TIER 2 RATE XXX
12. Dial
Zone
Area
band tables
band table 1’1 17
tables 25
13. Dial 5 then dial 001 999 for surcharge rate in
: Dialing a 00 or a 000 as an
7, 9, and 13 clear the
current entry for those steps.
“SURCHARGE XXX
cents.
in
14. Dial
to program next call cost table and
repeat steps 2-14 until all tables are entered.
15. Dial configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LAST
RESORT
TABLE
1 RATE
2 RATF
U
1
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COST
20
I
SURCHARGE
2
SURCHARGE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
1. Dial 75.
PROGRAMMING”
“COSTING BANDS
“DISCARD DIGITS
Dlglts:When the telephone
is installed behind a host system
2. Dial 01 to program
costing bands.
3. Dial 4 to program
discard digits.
as a PBX or
access
ties must be dialed before obtaining ar
line dial tone. These access
shouldberemovedbeforecallsar
so that they are costed based on
ust the actual telephone numbers dialed
Jp to six different access codes entries
up to eight digits per entry can be
4. Dial 1 6 to select entry 1 6. “ENTRY X
I I I I I I
I
5
I
5. Dial # for no discard digits.
DEFAULT NO DISCARD
DIGITS ASSIGNED
Dial up to 6 discard digits
I
then dial
6. Dial
and repeat steps 4-5 to
program next discard digit entry.
7. Dial
Dial
for next SMDA feature.
for configuration mode.
PROGRAMMING”
2. Dial 02 to program dial time limit.
“DIAL TIME XXX
TIME I
DEFAULT 0 SEC.
Dial Tlme Llmlt: The amount of time tha 1. Dial 75.
the system ignores for dialing purposes
programmable. Dialingtimeisnot
when the time of a call is recorded for
costing.
3. Dial time in tenths of a minute
999.
or dial 000 to clear).
4. Dial
for next SMDA feature.
5. Dial
for configuration mode.
PROGRAMMING”
2. Dial 03 to program answer time limit.
“ANSWER TIME XXX
3. Dial time in tenths of a minute (001 999
ANSWER TIME I
Answer Tlme Llmlt: The system can be 1. Dial 75.
DEFAULT 0 SEC.
programmed to wait for a period of time
before beginning call cost recording. Thi!
time will allow for a call to ring and be
answered before being costed.
“XXX
or dial
toclear).
4. Dial for next SMDA feature.
5. Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base
STATION
Five different call cost reports can be produced by the system for printing. They are:
1. Detailed report of all station
2. Detailed report of all accounts
3. Trunk summary report
4. Department summary
5. All records
Reports are generated automatically
printing whenever the system detects that the records storage area is ninety-five percent full. The reports to
be printed are chosen by programming action and are printed in the order of selection. The system can be programmed for these reports to be
generated automatically for printing at a certain time each day.
Programming action can also be taken so that all printed records are then deleted
except for those collected during the printing operation.
These are stored for later printing.
PROGRAMMING”
al 04 to define department numbers.
DEPARTMENTS”
that SMDA call cost reports can be
produced on a department by departmen
basis.-.
3. Dial
1
6 for dept. 18.
4. Dial 0000 9999 for department number.
5. Dial
for next department, and repeat steps
NOTE: Each station in the system can
be assigned to a department for
call costing purposes a/though
no assignment is required.
3 7untilalldepartmentsarenumbered.
6. Dial
7. Dial
for next SMDA feature.
for configuration mode.
Refer to the procedure given on
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
I
REFERENCE RECORD
DESCRIPTION
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
PROGRAMMING
. Dial 75.
CATEGOR
Codes: Account codes are
identify calls by category, or by any
desired grouping, so that costing by
category or grouping can be
worded. An account code can be a
of three numbers and a
Dial 05 to configure account codes.
CODE
a. Dial account
number (000 999).
b. Dial plus next account number.
c. Repeat steps a and b until all account numbers
of eight numbers.
are assigned.
d. Dial
Dial
for next SMDA feature.
to clear account codes.
“CLEAR ACCT. CODE”
number (000 999).
b. Dial # plus next account number.
a. Dial account
c. Repeat steps
are cleared.
a
and b until all account numbers
d. Dial
for next SMDA feature.
Dial 07 to enable account
for use.
“XXXXXXX ACCOUNT”
a. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On Enabled).
-OR-
- Dial 1 to enable (Al LED On).
“ENABLE ACCOUNT”
“DISABLE ACCOUNT’
for next SMDA feature.
Dial 2 to disable.
b. Dial
i. Dial 08 to enable system to compare user
account code entry with programmed
account code.
XXX
a. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On Enabled).
-OR-
- Dial 1 to enable comparison.
ON
(Al LED On)
Dial 2 to disable comparison.
OFF
b. Dial
for next SMDA feature.
on next page.
Press SPKR to end.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
# 7 4 6 for base level.
I
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Account Codes:
6. Dial 09 to program the account code maximum
length. “MAXACCT. CODE X”
Dial 3 6 for number of digits (3 min.; 6 max.).
“MAXACCT. CODE
7. Dial
for next SMDA feature
for configuration mode.
Dial
PROGRAMMING”
“DISPLAY TIME XX
1. Dial 75.
2. Dial 10.
Account Code Dlsplay: As
users of LCD speakerphones,
a
feature for
a
message can be programmed to appear
onthestationdisplaytoprompttheuser
toenteranaccountcodeduring
and/or outgoing calls. The message
display time is programmable.
Dial01 20 to display time in seconds.
“DISPLAY TIME YY
Dial for next SMDA feature.
3. Dial 11 to program message disable
on incoming calls.
“XXXXXXX INCOMING”
PressAlto toggle between enable and disable
(LED On Enabled).
-OR-
- Dial
“ENABLE
1
to enable.
(Al LED on).
Dial 2 to disable
“DISABLE INCOMING”
Dial for next SMDA feature.
4. Dial 12 to program message disable
on outgoing calls.
“XXXXXXX OUTGOING”
PressAlto toggle between enable and disable
(LED On
-OR-
- Dial 1 to enable.
(Al LED On).
Enabled).
“ENABLE OUTGOING
Dial 2 to disable
“DISABLE OUTGOING”
5. Dial
for next SMDA feature.
-OR-
Dial
Press SPKR to end.
I
forconfigurationmode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
I
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
REFERENCE RECORD
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
I. Dial 75.
Dial 13 for auto report time.
PROGRAMMING”
“AUTO TIME XXXX
itatlon Message Detall Accounting
SMDA) Prlntout: Call cost reports,
bythesystemforprinting, are
lenerated automatically whenever the
detectsthattherecordsstorage
isninety-fivepercentfull.Program
he system to automatically generate
hese reports for printing at a certain time
dayifdesired.
Dial new time in hours and minutes (HH MM
in 24 hour time) or dial
Dial 14 for report definition.
Choose reports for printing.
to accept current time.
“AUTO REPORT
Dial
1
for sta. report.
“STATION REPORT
“ACCOUNT REPORT
“LINE REPORT
“DEPT. REPORT
“PRINT RECORDS
“DELETE RECORDS
“DCD REPORT
Dial 2 ac’t. report.
Dial 3 line report.
Dial 4 dept. report.
Dial 5 print ail.
Dial 6 delete records.
Dial 7 for DCD report.
Dial for next SMDA feature.
Dial
for configuration mode.
ro program SMDR
I. Dial 77.
repoftlng,
Message Detall Reportlng
Prlntout: Program the system
PRINT
‘or the SMDR to provide continuous
of system-wide station call
“XXXXXXX
2. Dial
1
3. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
it is collected by the system if desired.
programmingactionwillcause
the printing of the cost of each reported
tobeincludedwhentheprintout
(Al LED On = Enabled).
-OR-
- Dial 1 to enable .
(Al LED on)
Dial 2 to disable.
“WITH COSTING
“WITHOUT COSTING
4. Dial
program for SMDR prlntout,
1. Dial 77.
2. Dial 2 .
for configuration mode.
PRINT XXX
3. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(Al LED On = Enabled)
-OR-
- Dial 1 to enable
(Al LED on).
ON
Dial 2 to disable printing
OFF”
4. Dial
for configuration mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENDANT CONFIGURATION
Mark the desired selections in the charts to record programming needs.
Dial the feature code and then dial the selection code or press the programming button to program the selection.
When a
action
A current program setting is indicated by a lighted LED next to fhe programming button for
is provided by a single button, the lighted LED indicates when the feature is active.
selection.
REFERENCE RECORD
DESCRIPTION
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
Level: The first step in any
sequence is to enter the
level. Once in this mode,
programming can be
MO D E
Press
#.
Wormed.
“SET CLOCK
Clock: The system
naintains current date and time
nformation. This information is
to an LCD speakerphone for
Dial W-23 for hr.
Dial W-59 for min.
Dial
99 for yr.
Dial 01 12 for mo.
Dial # to assign hours
and minutes.
Dial 01 31 for day
Dial
Dial
for hr.
59 for min.
2. Dial
for configuration
RECORDSPEED DIAL NUMBERS ON PAGE
SPEED DIAL
99 for storage location. “XXXXXXXX...”
1. Dial 02.
2. Dial 01
System Speed
system-wide list of numbers can be
for automatic dialing by all
A special
“LINE:
3. Dial #to clear current entry.
4. Choose line, line group, or intercom
to be used with speed dial
“LINE XX
number.
Line port 1-14
Dial 01 14 or press Al A14.
Line port
Dial
or press
Line port 17-24
Dial 17
24
or press HOLD, Al A8.
Dial 90 for last line
used or prime line.
“ P R IME
Continued on next page
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
I
RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY
‘EATURE DESCRIPTION
Dial 91 94 for line group l-4.
Speed
continued
“LINE GROUP
Press
button for intercom line.
“INTERCOM
5. Dial number for storage (32 digits max).
.
If required, press HOLD button to store a pause.
If required, press TAP button to store a
6. Press
button to save the number.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for all speed dial numbers.
Press
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL RECORD
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press
7 4 6 for base level.
I
REFERENCE RECORD
CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY’
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
“NIGHT XFER XXX
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
(LED On = Enabled).
ENABLE
DEFAULT
DISABLE
DISABLED
1. Dial 03.
Nlght Transfer (of ringing): The
attendant can place the system into the
night transfer (of ringing) mode of
operation. While in this mode, special
line/station ringing assignments are
enabled.
Dial
1
to enable
“NIGHT XFER ON
“NIGHT XFER OFF
for configuration mode.
(Al LED on).
Dial 2 to disable.
3. Dial
NOTE: See night transfer of tinging on
page 4-37 for line/station
ringing
assignments
XXXXXXXX
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable
ENABLE
DEFAULT
DISABLE
ENABLED
Press 04.
on Hold: Music is provided to
outside lines that are placed on hold if
an external music source is connected
to the system. Music on hold can be
disabled by attendant action.
q
(LED On = Enabled).
ENABLED
Dial
1
to enable.
(Al LED on).
Dial 2 to disable
DISABLED
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
“LCD MESSAGES
0 for message number.
1. Dial 05.
LCD Messaglng: A message can be
set at any system station and displayed
by any LCD speakerphone that calls it
on the intercom line. Two standard
messages are provided for use but the
attendant can create up to 10 custom
messages if needed.
2. Dial
3. Dial
1
to clear current message.
Refer to Table 4-l (page
and compose message (16 digits max.).
5. Dial all
codes necessary to enter
the message.
Dial 10 for pre-programmed message
“BACK AT
Dial 20 for pre-programmed message
“CALL
6. Dial
for next message location and
repeat steps 2
5.
7. Dial
for configuration mode.
Press SPKR to end.
I
r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
# 7 4 6
for base level.
REFERENCE RECORD
ENTRY CODE AND PROMPTING DISPLAY‘
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
“STATION NAMES
I. Dial 06.
Select station port to be programmed:
Statlon Names: Stations can be
assigned individual names or category
names that will be displayed by an LCD
speakerphone when it is called by the
station. Typical names could be TEC
Station 10 57: Dial 10
57 .
Dial # to clear current station name.
1. Refer to Table 4-l (page
SER, MKT
J Smith.
and compose station name (7 digits max.).
Dial all
codes necessary to enter a
new station name.
Dial
7. Dial
for next station and repeat steps 2-5.
for configuration mode.
REPORTS
1. Dial 07.
2. Choose
Statlon Message Detall
for printout
(SMDA) Printout: The attendant can
command the system to print several
different types of SMDA reports and to
delete all stored SMDA records.
“STATION REPORT
“TRUNK REPORT”
Dial 3 # for SMDA dept. “DEPT. REPORT
Dial
1
for station.
for trunk
Dial 2
Dial 4
for ac’nt
REPORT
NOTE: The departmental call
Dial 5
for auto report. “AUTO REPORT
distribution report
statistics
departmental station
Dial 6 # for all records. “PRINT RECORDS
based on
assignments. Before c/ass of service
programming is used to reassign
stations to different departments, it is a
good practice to: (1) print the
Dial 7 # to delete SMDA records.
“DELETE RECORDS
Dial 0 # for DCD report
Dial 8 to obtain the number of free records
REPORT
call report and any other
“FREE RECS XXXXX
remaining in system.
desired SMDA reports, (2) make any
“ABORT PRINT
Dial 9 to abort printout.
desired
(3) delete
3. Dial
for configuration mode.
SMDA records.
Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Programming
SECTION 3
VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINAL PROGRAMMING
Successive entries are separated by a space or a
comma.
INTRODUCTION
The class of service can be programmed from a video
display terminal (VDT) instead of from the
GENERAL INFORMATION
programming station. The VDT that is used must be a
There are two responses which allow a programmer to
serial-data,
type, asynchronous device.
keyboard send/receive (KSR) hard-copy printer can be
used instead of a VDT if preferred.
A
quit
a
procedure.
l
RETURN (ENTER on some keyboards)
This
A personal computer (PC) can be employed if it will
action returns the user to the top of the current
menu.
run
a
communications software program which allows
it to emulate a data terminal device (DTE equipment).
Many effective communications software programs
are available for this purpose. Any that can be
arranged to match the following data communications
parameters can be used:
l
CONTROL C
top of the main menu.
This action returns the user to the
There are certain other responses which have special
functions.
Full Duplex
XMODEM communication protocol (8 bit data
required)
l
Responding with the
key will print or display the
menu that the programmer is currently using. The
system is waiting at the same prompt line as it was
before the menu was repeated.
Regardless of the type of programming terminal
employed, it is connected to the common equipment
data port A. Refer to the Chapter 3, Section 2
paragraph tiled, DATA DEVICE
l
Responding with the ? key will cause a help menu
to be printed if one is available. The system is
complete connection details.
waiting at the same prompt line as
help menu was requested.
was before the
VDT PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
There are special line edit characters.
INTRODUCTION
The programming procedure is menu driven.
Backspace, Delete, Rub-out Used to delete
characters from the response line as they are being
typed.
A list of selections are presented for consideration
which differ in content and required response.
CONTROL
be echoed for review.
Causes the current response line to’
Each selection, when responded to, either causes a
further breakdown of selections to be presented or
causes a particular COS programming action to
take place.
CONTROL D
be deleted.
Causes the current response line to
This menu system prompts the programmer for the
required response and, where appropriate, will
repeat prompts to allow programming of more than
one device without having to make another menu
selection.
CONTROL S
stop.
Causes printing or display action
Causes the printing or display to
CONTROL
resume.
There are two system acknowledgement messages to
a response line.
All of the menus operate in the same manner.
They differ in only the required response.
COMMAND ACCEPTED
Response accepted.
Each prompt requires a response followed by a
Carriage Return (RETURN). The responses
usually consist of a one or two-digit number or a
string of numbers or alpha-numeric characters
when programming names and messages.
***COMMAND REJECTED**’
accepted. The terminal bells also sounded.
Response not
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System Programming
PROCEDURE
Connect the network jack of the data modem to an
outside telephone line. (If a line is not reserved for
remote programming, a line can be installed
1. Determine the system programming parameters,
and record them for future reference.
so that an outside telephone line can be switched
by on-site personnal between the data modem and
the common equipment cabinet when remote
programming is to be done.)
2 . Turn on the AC power to the system and the VDT.
3 . Press the RETURN (ENTER) key. The system
enters an approximate 20 second timeout cycle.
Step 4 must be performed within this timeout period
or the programming sequence will be aborted.
Refer to the user’s manual for the modem, and
program the modem to automatically answer after
the first ring.
4 .
Type the password: I
7 4 6
and press
RETURN (ENTER). The VDT will display the main
programming menu. The system enters an
approximate 3 minute timeout cycle. A selection or
response must be entered within this timeout
period, otherwise; the programming sequence is
aborted.
Interface the VDT or PC with the modem at the
programming site per the user’s manuals for the
equipment be used.
OPERATION
5 .
Execute the programming procedures by
responding to the prompts listed in first the main
menu and then in subsequent menus.
To establish
a
communications link for programming
the system from a remote site, proceed as follows:
If a line switch is being employed, call someone at
the customer site, and ask that the switch be set for
modem operation.
REMOTE PROGRAMMING
The telephone system can be programmed remotely
using the following equipment:
A VDT or a PC and appropriate software program,
A pair of data modems.
After the outside line is connected to the modem,
the data link can be made between the originating
and the remote modems.
The data modems can be any commercially available
Programming can then be performed from the remote
site just as if the VDT or PC was connected directly to
the system.
300 or
capability. Be sure to verify the auto-answer capability
before purchasing the units. is recommended that
200 baud type with auto-answer
the same make and model of modem be used at both
the installation site and the remote programming site.
TYPICAL PC OPERATION
The following procedure is given as a typical example
for using a PC and an XMODEM-type communications
software program to program the telephone system. It
is only provided for illustration and reference purposes
and describes a set-up using a typical
INSTALLATION
The equipment connections at the customer location
are as illustrated in Figure 4-3 on page 4-80, Connect
the equipment for remote programming as illustrated
therein and discussed below.
communications software program known as
PROCOMM (produced by Datastorm Technologies,
Inc.). Many other communications software programs
are also available which can be used for this purpose.
Individual operating procedures may vary with
different communications software programs but the
general process is similar to this.
Determine the signal needs of the modem from the
user’s manual for it.
Wire the proper connector (to match the data jack)
on one end of a length of multiline cable.
1. Perform turn-on and program-load procedures.
operating through modems, take action, as
described in the previous discussion, to establish a
communications link between the PC and the
common equipment.
Punch down the appropriate leads on the connector
block. Refer to Chapter 3 for connection details as
needed.
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Programming ,
66-083
2. If the PC is directly connected to the common
equipment, match the data communications
parameters of the software program to those now
programmed at the telephone system.
Press ESC then press ENTER to end the
terminal parameter set up.
When computer screen displays a prompt for
4.
password, type I
7 4 6 &then press ENTER.
This causes main COS programming menu to be
displayed.
If remote programming is being employed, the data
parameters of the PC must match the modem
From main menu, type 1 then press ENTER. This
causes system COS programming menu to be
displayed.
connected to it. The modem
common equipment must match the data
parameters of it as well.
the
5.
6.
From system menu, make all selections necessary
to perform class of service programming then
return to the main menu.
NOTE: Remember,
protocol.
data is required for XMODEM
the common equipment is not now
programmed to provide
data, it
have
to be re-programmed from station 10 (see
page 4-7 for details) before data
communications can take place. The baud
rate to match the modem or the PC should be
set at the same time.
7. From the main menu, type 4 then press ENTER.
This causes load/save menu to be displayed.
From load/save menu, down-load COS data from
common equipment to computer or up-load COS
data from computer to common equipment,
8.
Set the data communication parameters as follows:
Press ALT P.
Down-Load COS Data From Common
Equlpment To Computer
Type 11 the press ENTER. This action selects
a baud rate of 9600 baud.
Type 1 then press ENTER.
Press PAGE DOWN.
Type 17 then press ENTER. This action selects
8-bit data.
Type
1
to choose XMODEM protocol.
Type
one stop bit.
the press ENTER. This action selects
Type file name for down-loaded COS data to
save into.
Type 24 then press ENTER. This action saves
the data parameters.
Press ENTER. The COS data, as programmed
in the common equipment, is automatically
down-loaded to the computer file.
3. Set the terminal parameters as follows:.
l
Press ALT S.
Up-Load COS Data From Computer To Common
Equipment
l
Type 2 then press ENTER.
Type 2 then press ENTER.
Press PAGE UP.
l
l
Type
1
then press ENTER.
Use arrow keys to select VDT-100 or similar
emulation then press ENTER.
Type
1
to choose XMODEM protocol.
Type file name of saved COS data.
NOTE:
the terminal emulation for a
emulation will provide a
set of default values; however, any emulation
or
Press ENTER. The COS data, as stored in the
computer file, is automatically up-loaded to the
common equipment.
which provides
satisfactory.
duplex operation is
Press ESC to finish.
Repeat step 8 except type 3 to down-load currently
stored auto dial and speed dial numbers or type 4
to up-load them.
9.
Press S then press ENTER. This action saves
the terminal parameters.
to main menu and log off.
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment Cabinet
Video Display Terminal Or
rt
Personal Computer
Data Jack
Data Jack
I
Network Jack
Figure
Remote Programming Block Diagram
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Programming
66-083
l
l
Master Clear System Data
Default Toil Restriction Tables
MENU DESCRIPTIONS
C.O.S. Programming
1. System C.O.S.
2. Line C.O.S.
3. Station C.O.S.
4. Toll Restriction Table Administration
5. Information
On each
user as to whether the
response to the question is yes (Y), the default is
performed.
selection, the system questions the
If
should be made.
When defaulting selected station data, the station to
be defaulted must be identified by port number (10
6. Logoff
5 7 )
Enter Selection:
l
Selection 2: System Options
MAIN MENU SELECTIONS
l
Voice/Tone Announce First on Intercom
(Choose either Voice or Tone signailing as
standard intercom signalling method.)
l
Selection 1: Chooses system COS programming.
Selection 2: Chooses line COS programming.
Selection 3: Chooses station COS programming.
l
l
Station Message Desk (Assign or clear one
station port as the central message desk.)
l
Assign Extension Number to Port (Gives a
station flexible extension numbers from 2
digits.)
l
4
l
Selection 4: Chooses toil restriction table
administration programming.
l
Assign Pilot Number to Department (Gives an
entire department one extension number.)
l
l
Music on Hold
l
Selection 5: Choses an information menu to
provide assistance with VDT programming.
Do Not Disturb Inhibit
l
Station Monitoring (Visual ring indication for
station with BLF appearance at programmed
station can be enabled or disabled.)
System C.O.S. Programming
1. System Defaults
2. System Options
l
Tandem Attendent (One or both attendants can
receive timed hold recall and recall from
transfer.)
3. System Timing
4. Load
Save C.O.S. Data
5. Serial Communication Parameters
6. C.O.S. Data Printout
l
Voice Mail Auto Transfer (Enables immediate
line transfer when voice mail unit is included with
system.)
7. Set Clock Date
Time
8. SMDA Programming
9. SMDR Print Parameters
l
Disable Stations (Disable station ports)
. System Alarm Reporting
IO. Logical
Il. Logical
Physical Assignments
Physical Assignments
Stations
Lines
l
PA Options (Enables direct ringing, delayed
ringing, or night transfer (of ringing) and zone
paging on the PA port. Also chooses ringing
port relay control as either paging port or station
17.
Automatic Station Relocation
Feature inhibit Programming
14. Enable Ail inhibited Features
LCD Messages
Software Version Number
Return To Previous Menu
The station to be programmed must be identified by
port number (10 57).
When assigning extension numbers, enter station port
or department number then make extension number
entry.
Enter Selection
SYSTEM COS MENU SELECTIONS
Selection 3 : System timing (system timing
l
Selection 1: System defaults
requirements)
l
.
l
Defautt Ail System Data
Default Ail Line Data
l
Recall
TAP Time
. Pause Time
Timed Hold Recall Time
. Transfer Recall Time
Defautt Ail Station Data
Defautt Selected Station Data
Pulse Dial on All Lines
Tone Dial on Ail Lines
l
.
.
l
Call Park Recall Time
l
l
Extended DTMF Dialing Tones
.
Default key Mapping on ail Stations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Progamming
assignments
stations (For example; assign station extension 25
to station port 25. Also refer to the
provided on page 3-6.)
66-083
l
Selectlon 10:
l
l
Selection 4: Load/Save COS data (on cassette
tape and the transfer of this data through remote
programming)
Selection
data port A and data port B)
5
:
Serial communication parameters (for
l
l
Selection 11: Logical/physical assignments
(For example; assign line 1 to line port 1. Also refer
to the discussion on page 3-5.)
lines
l
l
l
Selection 6: COS data printout
Selection 7: Set clock date/time.
Selectlon 12: Automatic station relocation (allows
individual features to be physically relocated without
losing their programming parameters and extension
asignments)
Selection 8: SMDA programming (Configures the
Station Message Detailed Accounting feature. Also
refer to page 4-59 for an explaination of call costing
and SMDA reporting.)
l
l
l
Selection 13: Feature
programming (allows
individual features to be inhibited)
l
Assign Area Codes
Prefixes to Bands
l
Enter band number O-7, enter 0 for no band, or
enter area codes or prefixes as 200-999.
Selection 14: Enable all inhibited features (will
enable all features inhibited selection 13)
l
l
Set Dial Time Limit (non-costed time allowed for
dialing to take place in l/l 0 min)
Selection 15: LCD messages (programs the
messages for the LCD messaging and response
Set Answer Time Limlt (non-costed time allowed
for call to ring and be answered in l/l 0 min)
messaging
features)
l
Define Department Numbers (Calls can be
costed on a department basis by department
basis.)
l
Selectlon 16: Software version number (identifies
the software release version of the system)
.
Assign Stations to Departments (for costing by
department)
Line C.O.S. Programmlng
1. Line Type
l
Set Account Codes (Calls can be identified by
account code for costing by
2. Line Group Assignment (reads “Reserved” if no
hybrid strap is installed)
l
l
Clear Account Codes
strap installed)
3. Line Dialing Mode
4. Line Privacy Release
Enable Account Codes Wiih
account code entry is compared
programmed account code.)
(User
5. Line Toll Restriction Table Assignments
6. Line Abandoned Hold Release Time
7. Set Up a Line ( Using a Model Line )
8. Assign Name to Line
l
l
Enable Account Codes
account code entry is not compared with
programmed account code.)
Verify (User
Disable Account Codes
9. Assign Line to Department
10. Exclusive Hold
Account Code Message Display Parameters
(LCD speakerphones can prompt users for
account code entry on incoming and/or outgoing
calls.)
11
Mail Line I.D.
12. D.I.S.D. Assignments
13. Return To Previous Menu
l
Account Code Message Display Time
Maximum Account Code Length
Call Cost Tables
l
Enter Selection:
LINE COS MENU SELECTIONS
l
Call Cost Exception Tables
In each line COS menu selection, after choosing the
.
Automatic Reports (Call cost reports can be
produced for
feature, enter all line
numbers which are to be
assigned to it.
l
SMDA Delete By Attendant (allows attendant to
delete SMDA records)
l
Selection 1: Llne type (specifies the characteristics
of the line port)
l
9: SMDR print parameters (enables Or
disables call cost reporting along with a Station
Message Detail Report).
Disabled
l
Auxiliary (Configures port for installation of
external paging amplifier.)
.
(Typical line connection)
4-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Programming ,
66-083
l
l
l
Selectlon 2: Assign name to station
l
Selection 2: Line group assignment (assigns line to
line groups, will be reserved
installed)
the hybrii strap is not
Selection 3: Assign station to department
Selectlon 4: Assign station to SOHVA groups
Selectlon 5: Line/Intercom features
l
l
Selection 3: Line dialing mode (pulse or tone to
match the connected line)
l
Prime Line (assign prime line, prime group,
prime intercom, or clear all)
Selection 4: Line privacy release (releases privacy
on a line)
.
Ringing Line Preference (enable or disable)
Selectlon 5: Line toll restriction table assignment
Selection 6: Line abandoned hold release time
l
Line Access Deny (enable or disable station
access to a line)
l
l
l
Line Originate Deny (enable or disable station
ability to originate a call on a line)
Selection 7: Set up a line (Using a model line)
(provides a means of programming a group of lines
to match the programming of a model line)
l
Idle Line Preference (enable or disable access
to an idle line when station is taken off hook)
l
l
Block Voice Announce Intercom Call
l
l
l
l
Selection 8: Assign name to line.
Selection 9: Assign line to department.
Selectlon 10: Exclusive hold.
Audible Monitoring (audible ringing sounded for
stations with BLF appearance at programmed
station)
l
Selection 6: Ringing assignment
l
Personal Ringing Tones (One of four different
tones can be chosen. Refer to page 4-29 for
frequencies if required.)
Selection 11: Voice mail line ID (Specifies
identification number of a particular line to the voice
mail accessory for personalized call coverage)
l
l
Direct/Delayed Ringing (of each line assigned to
programmed
station)
Night Ringing (enable or disable night transfer,
of ringing, to programmed station for
programmed lines)
l
Selection 12:
assignment (Assigns
lines and specifies calling characteristics of them)
to
Station C.O.S. Programming
1. Set Up a Station (Using a Model Station)
2. Assign Name to Station
l
7: Button mapping (assign functions to
buttons)
3. Assign Station to Department
4. Assign Station to SOHVA Group
5. Line/ Intercom Features
6. Ringing Assignment
7. Button Mapping
Special Note:
Ax and Bx codes as shown in Figure
buttons are identified by
on page
449 and on fhe programming overlay supplied
with the system, do not type an “B” before
number when identifying it for function
the
8. Toll Restriction Administration
9. Automatic Busy/ RNA Call Forwarding
10. Miscellaneous Feature Programming
11. Return To Previous Menu
assignment. To do so, causes the system to
interpret the typed entry as a line number choice
instead of a button number choice.
l
Functions that can be assigned are identified per
the following list:
Enter Selection:
To display list, enter
Return to key mapping with Control
STATION COS MENU SELECTION
BLK . . . . . . . . . Blank
In each station COS menu selection, after choosing
24)
the feature, enter a station port number which is to be
assigned to it and enter line port ‘numbers where
(10 57)
DND
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Do Not Disturb
. . .
PRI . . . . . . . . . . Privacy
prompted.
station number entries are allowed
. . . . . . . . . . 2nd Intercom
for some features as prompted.
SAV . . . . . . . . . Save
. . . . . . . . Account Code Button
ACC. . . . . . . . . Zone
l
Selectlon 1: Set up a station (Using a model
station) (program a group of stations to match the
programming of model station)
Page (l-3)
AC . . . . . . .
All Call
a
. . . . . . . . Auto Callback
C F . . . . . . . . . . . Call Forward
ACB
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Svstem Proaammina
(arrange port to allow DTMF
tones to pass through to connected equipment)
. . . . . . . . . Call
. . . . . . . . . Line Group (l-4)
Park (l-9)
VAB . . . . . . . . Voice Announce Block
TGQ . . . . . . . . Line Group Queue
EX.. . . . . . . . . .
Executive Override
Do Not Disturb Override
Service Observing
Exit Button Mapping
All-Call and Zone Paging
Message Wait Originate
Head Set Mode
System displays list of current key mapping at station.
equipment. Some keys listed may not be present on
the station being programmed.
l
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Group Call Pickup
Enter new function for key and press ENTER, or press
ENTER to accept current function.
Secure Off Hook Voice Announce
Data Security Ports
l
Selection 8: Toll restriction administration (assigns
toll tables to station)
LCD Call Costs (display of cost for current call)
System alarm recipient
l
l
Toll Restriction Table Assignment (assign
pre-programmed toll restriction tables to be
applied to all regular calls)
Unobservable
station
Voice mail transfer on busy for station
Voice mail port
Night Mode Toll Restriction Table Assignment
(assign pre-programmed table to be applied to
calls on night transferred line)
l
System Speed Dial Toll Restriction (assign
pre-programmed toll restriction tables applied to
system speed dial numbers)
Toll Restriction Table Administration
1. Build
2. Build
Modify an Allow Table
Modify a Deny Table
l
Selection 9: Automatic busy/RNA forwarding
3. Clear a Table
Entry
(Links programmed station to another one to form
hunt group. Also, selects number of rings to occur
at programmed station before ring-no answer
(RNA) call is forwarded to linked station.
4. Return To Previous Menu
Enter Selection
TOLL RESTRICTION TABLE ADMINISTRATION
l
Selection 10: Miscellaneous feature programming
(programs a variety of features for the station)
Use the toll restriction table administration menu to
build toll restriction tables for line and station
assignment. Refer to page 4-52 for a discussion
concerning toll restriction table construction and
assignment.
l
Automatic Privacy Release (Enable or disable
automatic privacy release or a per line basis.)
l
l
Line Auto Hold (active line automatically held
when new line is selected)
Intercom Auto Hold (intercom automatically
when new line is selected)
4-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION 10
PROGRAMMING OVERLAY
l
l
l
Cut out along border.
Cut out shaded openings.
Fit over station faceplate.
A0
A9
Al
10x14
OVERLAY
A2
A10
A l l
A 4
Al2
Al?
A5
A 6
A 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION 10 PROGRAMMING OVERLAY
l
Cut out along border.
l Cut out shaded openings.
l Fit over station faceplate.
A6
A9
92
5 x 1 4
PROGRAMMING
OVERLAY
A l l
A4
Al2
A5
A6
A l ‘
A7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STATION
PROGRAMMING OVERLAY
l
Cut out along border.
Cut out shaded openings.
l
. Fit over station faceplate.
A8
A9
Al
A2
A3
A10
A4
(REV I OR HIGHER)
PROGRAMMING
A12
Al3
Al4
A5
OVERLAY
A6
A7
L
B7
HOLD
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
66-083
CHAPTER5
SYSTEMOPERATINGPROCEDURES
SECTION 1
STATION OPERATION
ANSWERING CALLS
STATION MONITORING
ANSWERINGOUTSIDECALLS
With station monitoring enabled, a call ringing at a
monitored station can be answered at a monitoring
station.
If
ringing line appears at your telephone,
l
Press line button of ringing line (line button with
flashing light).
l
See flashing BLF light, then press DSS button. Light
turns off and call is answered.
l
Lift handset.
NOTE:
a prime line is assigned and is ringing,
if
ringing line preference is enabled, pressing the
line button of the ringing line is nut necessary.
To return to call from hold or an unanswered
transfer,
l
Press TAP button.
ANSWERINGINTERCOMCALLS
LINE ANSWER FROM ANY STATION
When the attendant station has enabled the night
transfer (of ringing) feature (denoted by a fluttering
To answer a voice call,
l
Speak toward the telephone.
l
Lii handset if privacy is desired.
light at stations 10 and
an outside call can
NOTE: Voice calling can be blocked. See the
discussion titled, Voice Announce Blocking for
details.
be answered from any station in the system.
l
Hear ringing (loud ringer, night transfer station, etc.).
l
handset.
Press ITCM.
Dial 80
To answer a tone call,
l
l
Lift handset to talk.
l
To respond in a non-verbal manner,
l
Answer call.
l
preprogrammed response message
programmable button to cause a set message to
appear in display of announcing station (if it is an
LCD speakerphone). This action also disconnects
the announcing station.
SECURE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
(SOHVA)
While a station is off-hook and busy on a call, a secure
off-hook voice announcement (SOHVA) may be
sounded through the handset receiver of the
telephone if it is programmed to allow SOHVA.
CALL PICKUP ANSWERING
DIRECT
To respond to a SOHVA announcement,
To answer a call that Is ringing at another
telephone,
Hear tone alert and announcement in handset
receiver. Distant
cannot hear announcement.
.
l
Lii handset.
Press and hold
button, and reply by speaking
l
Press ITCM.
into handset transmitter. Distant party cannot hear
response.
l
l
Dial
Dial extension number of ringing telephone.
Press and release MUTE button to return to distant
GROUP
To answer a call that Is
your pick-up group,
at any
Press preprogrammed response message
programmable button to cause a set message to
appear in display of announcing station (if it is an
LCD speakerphone). This action also disconnect.
the announcing station.
l
Lii handset.
Press ITCM.
Dial
l
l
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
MAKING CALLS
OUTSIDE LINE CALLING
Dial
8 and hang up. When line group is free,
sound several tone bursts.
station
l
Press line button to select line.
Lii handset, hear line dial tone, and place call.
NOTE: Selecting a line is not necessary if:
To cancel queuing,
l
l
A priority line has been assigned to a telephone (prime
line feature enabled).
Press ITCM.
Dial # 8, and hang up.
The telephone automatically picks an
line for use
when the handset is lifted (idle line preference feature
enabled).
INTERCOMCALLING
Intercom calls may be manually dialed or
l
l
Listen for dial tone.
Dial number.
automatically dialed using
a
preprogrammed Direct
Station Selection (DSS) button.
When party answers,
VOICECALLING
l
Lii handset.
To
call an Intercom statlon,
Lift handset.
To end call,
Hang up handset.
l
l
l
Press ITCM.
LINE GROUP ACCESS
If the system provides line groups,
l
Dial extension number. (To call system operator,
dial 0.)
l
Speak to called party.
l
l
Press ITCM.
Dial line group access code
9 = line group 1
To voice call a DSS number,
l
Lii handset.
81 = line group 2
82 = line group 3
l
Press programmable button that is programmed for
desired station.
l
Speak to called party.
83 = line group 4
Listen for dial tone.
Dial number.
NOTE: The outside line is automatically placed on
hold when a DSS button is pressed or when
l
l
the
button is pressed prior to manually
dialing an intercom extension number.
LINE AND LINE GROUP QUEUING
When a line or line group is busy, a station can be
placed in a queue to await the availability of it.
TONE CALLING
To tone call an Intercom statlon,
To queue for a busy line,
l
l
l
l
Lii handset.
Press ITCM.
Dial extension number.
l
Press HOLD.
l
Press line button of busy line. A short tone burst
will sound. When line is free, station will sound
several quick tone bursts.
Press
again. Called telephone will ring.
NOTE: Some systems may be programmed to tone
To queue for a busy line group,
signal as the first option. Pressing
a
l
Press ITCM.
second time is not necessary in this case
l
l
Dial line group access code
Hear busy tone.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System
,
66-083
To dial system speed dial numbers,
To tone call a DSS number,
Press
l
Liit handset.
l
Press keypad digits 01
speed dial number.
99 for desired system
l
Press programmable button that is programmed for
desired station.
l
Press ITCM. Called telephone will ring.
If on line listen to dial tone,
NOTE: The lights
adjacent to programmable
l
Press HOLD
digits 01 99.
and then press desired keypad
buttons indicate status of DSS telephones:
DARK indicates idle telephone, STEADY-ON
indicates telephone in use. FLASHING
indicates station is ringing (providing station
monitoring is enabled).
AUTOMATICDIALING
To automatically dial numbers,
l
Press desired programmable button.
SECURE OFF-HOOK
VOICE ANNOUNCE (SOHVA)
l
If desired programmable button is also programmed
for DSS (one-button intercom) calling.
To make a secure voice announcement to another
station that is off-hook or busy on a call,
If the calling station has a SOHVA originate button
programmed,
l
Press HOLD and then press desired programmable
button.
AUTOMATIC
Lift handset.
To activate automatic redial,
Make intercom call and hear busy signal.
l
Press programmable button pre-programmed for
Press SOHVA button and hear SOHVA warning
tones (six quick tone bursts). If busy signal
continues, message cannot be delivered until called
party picks up handset; however, called station will
sound intercom ringing.
that purpose.
active.
light flutters while auto redial is
l
Number will be dialed once a minute for ten minutes.
If called number Is busy,
Deliver message.
l
Press auto redial programmable button to
immediately start the re-dial cycle.
Wait on line for reply.
If the calling station
programmed,
not have a SOHVA button
If call is answered,
l
Take control by
handset. If control is not
l
Lii handset.
taken, call will drop.
l
Make intercom call.
To cancel automatic redial,
l
Hear SOHVA warning tones (six quick tone bursts).
If busy signal sounds, message cannot be delivered
until called party picks up handset; however, called
station will sound intercom ringing.
l
Press auto redial button, lift and replace handset, or
press any station button.
NOTE: Any user originated station activity during
If calling from an LCD speakerphone,
automatic redial
cancel the feature.
l
Called station may send non-verbal message
response for display. As non-verbal response
message is displayed, calling station is
disconnected.
LAST NUMBER
The last number previously dialed can be
automatically redialed with one-button or two-button
action.
SPEED DIALING
l
Dial #. (If on-line listening to dial tone, press HOLD
then dial
To dial station speed dial numbers,
l
Press keypad digit 0
9 for desired personal speed
l
Listen for ringing or busy tone.
dial number.
Ringing tone: When party answers, Iii handset.
OR-
Busy tone: Press
(SPKR) to disconnect.
If on line listen to dial tone,
l
Press HOLD and then press desired keypad digit
o-9.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System ‘Operation
To dial a saved number,
SAVED NUMBER
l
Lii handset. Listen for dial tone.
The first 16 digits of the last manually dialed number
can be saved for later redial.
l
Press HOLD then press pre-programmed
programmable button.
To save the number,
l
Press programmable button designated by class
service programming for this purpose.
Of
HOLDING CALLS
To retrieve direct hold call,
MANUAL HOLD
l
From the hold receiving extension, Dial # 9 0.
From the station which placed call on hold,
To place call on hold,
l
l
Press HOLD. Status light will flash for line calls.
Dial
4 plus the extension number of hold
Intercom hold causes intercom light to flash
statlon.
To retrieve held call,
CALL PARK
To park a call
l
Press button with flashing light.
-OR-
Park button (user programmed
.
For line calls, press TAP if station does not have
line appearance.
programmable button),
Press Park button. Light associated with button will
turn on.
To manually park a call,
l
EXCLUSIVE HOLD (Only your telephone can
retrieve held cell.)
l
l
l
While on line, press ITCM.
Dial
l
Press HOLD twice.
HOLD RECALL FEATURE
Dial a park orbii access code (91 99).
After a preprogrammed length of time, a call placed on
hold will automatically ring back to the telephone
which placed it on hold. If the call is on exclusive hold,
it will revert to manual hold after the hold recall time
period. The call can then be retrieved by anyone with
that line appearance.
NOTE:
a parked call is not retrieved within a
programmable limit (0 -6 minutes, O-never
recalls), it
to the parking station as a
standard held call.
To
parked call wlth Park button (user
programmed programmable button),
Press lighted Park button.
To manually a parked
From any extension, press ITCM.
DIRECT STATION HOLD
l
To place a call on direct hold (park a call at a
particular station),
l
l
l
l
While on line, press
hold).
(outside call placed on
Dial
Dial a park
access code
l
Dial
9 0 plus extension number of station to
receive parked call.
TRANSFERRING CALLS
SCREENEDTRANSFER
l
Dial extension number of party to be transferred to
(or press DSS button for one-button intercom
calling).
To transfer a
to another statlon In the system,
l
Answer outside call (Do not press HOLD.)
l
l
When intercom patty answers, announce call and
line number.
l
Press
hold
(Outside call is placed on
automatically.)
Hang up handset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System
.
66-083
If the called party Is busy or does not answer,
l
l
l
Press
hold automatically.)
(Outside call is placed on
l
Press
to retrieve call.
button or flashing line button
Dial extension number of party to be transferred (or
press DSS button for one-button intercom calling).
UNSCREENED TRANSFER
Hang up handset. If transferred call is not received
after pre-programmed length of time, it will ring back
at transferring station.
To transfer a call to another station In the system,
l
Answer outside call. (Do not press HOLD.)
To answer recall of transferred call,
l
Press TAP button.
Conferencing can include the originating station and
up to four outside lines, or four additional stations, or a
combination of stations and lines to a maximum total
of five parties.
l
Press line button of remaining party.
To drop outside
from conference,
l
Press HOLD to place all lines on hold before caller
hangs up. Not doing this will result in a tone
sounding in the handset receiver, interrupting the
FIVE-PARTYCONFERENCE
To set up a conference that includes outside lines,
intercom stations, or a combination of both (maximum
of five parties, originator plus four additional parties).
remaining
conferees.
To retrieve remaining lines and bring back Into
conference,
1. Make first call.
l
Repeat five-party conference procedure for all
remaining lines.
2. Press
Call is placed on hold
automatically.
3. Make next call.
4. Press
5. Repeat steps 2
UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE
CALL (Maximum of Two Outside Lines)
Conference is established.
4 to add up to two more parties.
Dropping out of a conference call and leaving up to
two outside lines in conference together is known as
an unsupervised conference call
NOTE: When setting up a conference call with outside
lines and inside stations, you must call the
outside lines first.
To do this,
# and hang up.
To continue conference with last conferee after
outside lines (up to three) have dropped out of
conference,
NOTE: Conference volume levels are dependent upon
the quality of the external lines.
MESSAGING
To turn off MW light from central message
desk,
MESSAGE WAITING CONTROL
The message waiting light at any telephone can be
turned on from another telephone to alert the user that
a message awaits pickup. The ability to control
message wafting lights is enabled by class of service
programming and is usually limited to one station in
the system. This station is designated as a central
message desk.
l
Press
Dial
l
l
Dial extension number of station that was alerted.
(The MW light of called station will turn off
To turn off
Press
light while delivering message,
To turn on MW light from central message
desk,
l
l
l
l
Press
Dial 3.
Dial extension number of station to be alerted. (The
MW light of called station will flash.)
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System Operation
To receive message at an alerted station,
l
Dial # 02.
Observe flashing MW light.
To send message for assistance while idle or on a
call,
l
handset.
Press
l
l
HOLD.
l
Press
ASSIST
button.
Connection to message desk is automatic.
l
If extension number of assisting station is not
programmed, press DSS button for it. If assisting
station is idle, tone burst sounds and message
appears on display. If it is busy, message appears
when it becomes idle.
LCD MESSAGING
System supplied messages can be set at a station to
be displayed by a calling LCD speakerphone
To turn on message,
STATION-TO-STATION
If a station has BLF appearance at another station, a
call-back message indication can be left at that station.
MESSAGING
l
Press ITCM.
l
l
Dial 02
Dial message code number (1
for list of messages available.
0). See attendant
To activate messaging,
l
Press MNTR (SPKR). Intercom light flashes.
l
Make intercom call and hear ring-back tone.
The default messages of “BACK AT” and “CALL” may
be provided for use:
l
Dial 7. BLF light at calledstation flutters.
To cancel messaging,
If “BACK AT” is provided as message
then dial time
in twelve-hour format after dialing message access
code 1.
If “CALL” is provided as message 2, then dial
extension that calls are forwarded to after dialing
message access code 2.
l
Press ITCM.
Dial # 7.
l
l
Dial extension number of station at which message
call-back indication was left.
To answer messaging,
To turn off message,
l
Press DSS button associated with lighted BLF light.
l
Press ITCM.
VOICE ANNOUNCE BLOCKING
To block voice calls,
Tounblock
calls,
l
Press ITCM.
l
Press
l
Dial
2.
l
Dial # 2.
LINE MONITORING
To cancel,
To
while on a call,
l
Lii handset to resume conversation
l
Press MNTR (SPKR). Monitor light will turn on.
l
Hang up handset.
l
Press
will turn off.
(SPKR) to disconnect. Monitor light
NOTE:
a distant party places the call on hold, the
station user can monitor in a handsfree
manner until the party returns, and then lift the
station handset to resume the call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
66-083
RECALL/FLASH
RECALL
FLASH
This feature provides disconnect and dial tone recall.
If a system has been configured recall,
Press TAP to disconnect current call and receive a
PBX,
and custom calling services may
require this feature.
If a system has been conflgured for flash,
Press TAP to generate a timed flash signal.
l
new dial tone for another call.
l
NOTE: A system can be configured for either flash or
recall but not for both.
PAGING
EXTERNAL PAGING
Requires external paging unit.
l
Dial zone number
Make announcement.
Hang up handset or wait on line for an answer.
or 87 for all-call).
l
l
l
l
handset.
Press
then dial 89.
MEET-ME PAGE (Answerback of Page)
l
Press programmable button programmed for paging
access.
To answer all-call or zone page from any
telephone,
l
Make paging announcement and hang up.
l
Lii handset.
l
Press ITCM.
ALL-CALL AND ZONE PAGING
l
Dial 88.
Meet paging party on line for private conversation.
l
l
Lii handset.
Press
DO NOT DISTURB
To
statlonrlngerandappearbusy
Through class of
programmlng, a statlon
to Intercom calls),
can be allowed to override a do not disturb (DND)
atanotherstatlon.
l
Press programmable button pre-programmed for
this purpose. (Associated light will turn on).
If DND overrlde Is allowed,
l
Make intercom call and hear busy signal.
NOTE: The calling party will hear two quick tone
bursts every 1.5 seconds. The feature cannot
be overridden by the calling party.
l
Dial
An intercom call rings at the called
station.
To cancel,
l
Press programmable button again. (Associated
light will turn off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System Operation
MUTE HANDSFREE ANSWER INHIBIT
T
O
out handsfree answer Of
Toprevent distant party from hearlng while
set Is lifted,
l
Press MUTE. MNTR (SPKR) light will flutter.
calls,
Press MUTE MNTR (SPKR) light will turn off.
l
Press MUTE. MNTR (SPKR) light will flutter.
To release handsfree answer of
Toresumetwo-way
l
l
Press MUTE. MNTR (SPKR) light will turn off.
PULSE/TONE SWITCHING
NOTE: Pulse/Tone
can be programmed into
number
the local telephone servlce Is pulse (rotary) but
tone generation Is requlred during the call, convert
auto dial numbers by pressing
storage.
to
while
as follows:
l
Press # at point in dialing sequence where
conversion to tone is required. (System will switch
back to pulse dialing when call is ended.)
PERSONAL RINGING TONES
A station user can select one of four different ringing
tones for use at a station.
FREQUENCY
PAIR
WARBLE
RATE
16Hz
16Hz
23 Hz
23 Hz
TONE
T O N E 1
TONE 2
TONE 3
TONE 4
Press
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
l
l
Dial 4.
Dial
or 4 (selects tones
or 4).
BACKGROUND MUSIC
Music must be supplied by the system before it can be
turned on at a telephone. Background music, when
supplied, automatically turns off during calls.
l
Adjust loudness of music with call monitor speaker
volume control.
To turn music off,
To turn music on,
l
Press
l
Press
l
Dial # 1. MNTR (SPKR) light will turn off.
l
Dial
1. MNTR (SPKR) light will turn on.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation ,
66-083
CALL FORWARD
A station user can designate another station to be the
recipient of just the intercom calls and prime line calls
that are directed to the user’s station or the recipient of
all calls that are directed to the user’s station.
CALL FORWARD ALL
To forward all calls to another telephone,
Press ITCM.
Dial
5.
CALL FORWARD PERSONAL
Dial extension number of station to which calls are to
be forwarded.
To forward Intercom calls and prime line to
another telephone,
To cancel all call forward,
Press ITCM.
l
Press ITCM.
l
Dial 05.
Dial 5.
l
Dial extension number of telephone to which calls
are to be forwarded.
NOTE: For each intercom call received during call
forward, a ring reminder (short tone burst) will
be heard at the called station to remind the
user that calls are being forwarded.
To cancel intercom call and prime line forwarding,
l
Press ITCM.
Dial # 05.
AUTOMATIC CALL-BACK
To arrange
the system to call back when a
l
handset. Called telephone will ring.
busy telephone becomes Idle,
NOTE: Call-bad< is cancelled if handset is not lifted.
l
Make intercom call. Hear busy signal.
To cancel automatic call back before It rings,
l
Dial 6.
l
Press ITCM.
Dial # 6.
‘Hang up.
l
Hang up. Calling telephone will ring when called
telephone becomes idle.
l
l
To answer call-back ring,
CALL WAITING
A call waiting tone can be sent to a busy station while
the calling station watts on line for an answer.
To cancel call waltlng.
Hang up handset.
To answer a call
l
To activate call waltlng,
tone,
Hear three short tone bursts over existing
l
l
Make intercom call and receive busy signal.
conversation.
l
Dial
0
(Called and calling parties hear three
l
l
Complete present call or place it on hold.
Hang up. Waiting call will begin ringing.
short tone bursts.1
Wait on line for an answer.
l
handset to answer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
SERVICE OBSERVING
A station can be programmed by system class of
. Dial extension number of station to be monitored.
Monitor the in-progress call.
To end observation,
Press MNTR (SPKR).
service to allow the user to
another station in an un-announced and muted
manner.
a conversation
l
l
Press ITCM.
l
l
Dial # 03.
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
A station can be programmed by system class of
service to allow the user to break into a conversation
at another station.
.
.
Dial
03. A warning tone will sound at the called
station.
Join in-progress call.
l
Make an intercom call, and hear busy signal.
ACCOUNT CODE OPERATION
Account codes are assigned by SMDA class of service
programming and are used by the system to identify
calls by category, or special grouping, for SMDA call
reporting purposes. Enter an account code while on
line either before an outgoing call is dialed, after the
distant party has hung up, or during a call. Account
code entry is voluntary. If it is not entered, an
outgoing call will still go through or an incoming one
can still be completed. To enter an account code, first
either dial the entry code or press an ACCOUNT
will turn off when account code is entered. It will
also turn off after 10 seconds with no account code
entry or if button is pressed a second time (to void
entry requirement).
Dial account code number. If error tone sounds or
error message shows on LCD, check account code
for validly and re-enter correct
Dial number to be called.
INCOMING CALL
CODE button
one is assigned by class of service
WITHOUT ACCOUNT CODE
programming). After doing this, dial the account code
number.
l
l
Answer call.
Press
placed on hold.
0 4. Incoming call is automatically
error tone sounds or error
OUTGOING CALL
WITHOUT ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON
l
l
Dial account
message shows on LCD, check account
and re-enter correct
for
Select line. Display on LCD speakerphone will
prompt for account code entry if feature is active.
Press line button to return to call.
Press
hold.
0 4. Line is automatically placed on
ACCOUNT CODE BUTTON
l
l
Answer call.
Dial account code. Listen for dial tone. If error tone
sounds or error message shows on LCD, check
account code for validly and re-enter correct code.
Press ACCOUNT CODE button and dial account
number anytime during call. If error tone
sounds or error message shows on LCD, check
Dial number to be called.
account
for validity and re-enter correct
WITH ACCOUNT CODE
NOTE:
ACCOUNT CODE button will on/y work
when account codes have been programmed
by SMDA class of service programming.
l
Select line. Display on LCD speakerphone will
prompt for account code entry if feature is active.
l
Press ACCOUNT CODE button. Associated LED
will flash while system awaits account code entry.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System
.
66-083
SPEAKERPHONE OPERATION
The optional speakerphone can use the previously
described features in handsfree manner. Handsfree
calling and answering is as described below.
l
Speak toward the telephone.
a
To end a call,
Press SPKR.
To place a call,
To
from speakerphone to handset,
handset.
from handset to speakerphone,
l
Press line button or ITCM.
l
l
Dial number or press programmable button.
When party answers, speak toward the telephone.
l
To
To answer a call,
Press a line button.
l
l
Press SPKR.
l
Hang up handset.
DEPARTMENTAL STATION OPERATION
When a station is within a departmental group of
stations, the station user can place the station in either
an off-duty or a wrap-up mode. In either mode the
station will refuse an outside or transferred call. The
call will then skip to the next station in the department.
To p/ace station in
Calls ring at another departmental station.
mode, press DND button.
To return to mode, press DND again.
To p/ace station in wrap-up mode, press SHIFT DND
buttons. Calls ring at another departmental station.
To
on-duty mode, press SHIFT DND again.
STATION USER PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
numbers can be programmed at any
Press specific line button,
button, or dial 1
4
for line groups, to store line pre-selection.
programmable button locations that do not have a line
assigned to them. They can also be programmed as a
If no line pre-selection is desired, dial 0 (system will
choose last line used at calling station).
secondary function at every
memory
Dial the number sequence to be stored. (Up to
sixteen digits can be stored. Valid digits include 0
location. Typical
dialed telephone numbers or extension numbers, or
frequently used host system or button system feature
codes. When programming an
numbers are: frequently
9,
and
l
To store a pause if required, press HOLD.
number, first
decide over which line the call must be made. Then,
determine the digits which normally have to be
manually dialed to reach the called party or feature.
This line selection and digit sequence can be stored
l
To store a hookflash if required, press TAP.
To store another number,
Press
l
l
l
l
as an
for later one or two-button access.
Press next programmable button.
Make line pre-selection if desired.
Dial number for storage.
line pre-selection is not programmed, the system will
automatically pick the prime line assigned to the
telephone (if enabled), or pick the last used line at that
station and place the call over that selection.
l
Repeat this procedure until all desired numbers are
stored.
To program autodlal numbers,
To end autodlal programming,
Press MNTR (SPKR).
l
Press
1.
l
l
Press desired programmable button. Listen for fast
tone bursts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System Operation
To end DSS programming,
Press MNTR (SPKR).
NOTE: An number can also be programmed
as a secondary function at every
location. See Automatic Dialing
STATION SPEED DIAL PROGRAMMING
l
Station speed dial numbers can be stored by the
station user for later redial. The storage locations are
keypad digits 0 through 9 on the station. Before
attempting to program, decide on the following
(1) the number or feature to be stored, (2) which
instructions for programming details.
storage location will be used (0
(3) the circuit that
the call will go over (individual line or intercom).
PROGRAMMING AUTOMATIC
BUTTON
To program numbers,
The system will allow the last previously dialed
number to be automatically and repeatedly redialed for
l
Press
2.
l
Dial a memory location (0 through 9). Listen for fast
tone bursts.
approximately ten minutes.
A
programmable button is
defaulted to provide this feature. A different
programmable button can be assigned for this function
if desired
l
specific line button,
button, or dial 1
4
for line groups, to store circuit pre-selection.
-OR-
*
If no circuit pre-selection is desired, dial 0 (system
will choose last line used at calling station or prime
line if one is assigned to calling station).
To program another programmable button for use
as an automatic
button,
Press
1.
l
Dial the number sequence to be stored. (Up to
sixteen digits can be stored. Valid digits include 0
To remove function assignment,
9,
and
Press current assigned programmable button, then
l
To store a pause if required, press HOLD.
press
button.
Press desired programmable button to receive
function. Listen for fast tone burst.
l
To store a hookflash if required, press TAP.
Example: Store
0. The number is
a
telephone number under location
Program as follows:
Press #to assign function.
Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
Line Button,
PROGRAMMING RESPONSE MESSAGE
BUTTON
To store another number,
l
Press
The system will allow a station user to make a
non-verbal response to an intercom call or to a secure
off -hook voice announcement. This response will
l
l
Press next speed dial location.
Make line pre-selection if desired.
Dial number for storage.
l
provide
a
preprogrammed message for display at the
l
Repeat this procedure until all desired numbers are
stored.
calling station if it is an LCD speakerphone.
To assign programmable button for non-verbal
one-button response,
To end station speed dial programming,
Press MNTR (SPKR).
l
l
Press desired programmable button.
Dial 5.
DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP
FIELD
PROGRAMMING
Dial message location number (1-O).
One-button intercom calling with visual indication of
telephone status can be programmed as
programmable buttons not assigned to lines.
NOTE: The response message is preprogrammed and
made available for use by attendant
programming.
To program DSS,
l
Press
(SPKR) to end.
l
Press
3.
Label button.
l
Press programmable button to be programmed
DSS button.
l
Dial extension number.
.
Repeat last two steps for all desired extension
numbers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
66-083
PROGRAMMING ASSIST
l
l
Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
Label button.
Press
1.
Press desired programmable button.
Dial 7.
PROGRAMMING SECURE OFF-HOOK VOICE
ANNOUNCE ORIGINATE
Dial 0
9 to choose preprogrammed message. See
l
Press
1.
attendant for list of messages.
l
Press desired programmable button.
Dial 8.
Dial
to choose system-provided message.
l
l
(System message is:
name or
Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
Label button.
extension number of station sending message.
Name or extension is automatically added by
system.)
l
If one particular station must
receive
message, dial extension number of that station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System
SECTION 2
STATION OPERATION
The attendant station provides additional operating features that are not available from other stations in the
system.
SYSTEM CLOCK
The system clock can be programmed to maintain
current date and time information . This information is
provided to the LCD speakerphone for display.
4. Dial two digits (01-12) for mo.
5. Dial two digits (01-31) for day.
6. Dial two digits (00-23) for hr.
1. Press ITCM.
7. Dial two digits
for min.
2.
1. .
8. Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
Dial two digits (00-99) for yr.
3 .
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL PROGRAMMING
A special system-wide list of numbers can be
programmed for automatic dialing by all users.
l
Press buttons
16.
, B2 for lines
or dial 15,
1. Press
l
Press HOLD then press buttons Al A8 for
lines 17 24 or dial 17 24.
2. Dial # 0 2.
l
l
Dial 91 94 for line groups 1
Press for intercom line.
4.
3 . Dial 01
Dial #to clear current entry.
5 . Choose line to be used:
99 to chose storage location.
6 . Dial the number to be stored (32 digits maximum).
l
Press HOLD to store pause
required).
l
Dial 90 for no line assignment (system will
choose last line used at calling station or prime
line if one is assigned to calling station).
l
Press TAP to store flash (if required).
7. Press
to save number.
l
Press buttons Al Al4 for lines 1-14 or dial 01
8 . Repeat steps 3
7 to store next number.
14.
9. Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
NIGHT TRANSFER (of ringing)
The day, or normal, ringing assignments of incoming
lines can be transferred to a particular station or
stations (these line/station ringing assignments are
chosen through class of service programming) for
off-hour or special-purpose answering. Additionally,
stations can be arranged through class of service
programming, to be able to answer any ringing outside
line. This line answer from any station action. is also
3. Press Al (top, left-hand programmable button) to
toggle feature on or off. Associated light will turn
on when night transfer is active and turn off when
is inactive.
O R
l
Dial 1 to enable (Al LED turns on).
Dial 2 to disable (Al LED turns off).
l
4. Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
enabled
the night transfer (of ringing).
NOTE: When this feature is on, the
flash.
light will
1. Press ITCM.
2. Dial # 0 3.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation .
66-083
MUSIC ON HOLD
on when music on hold is provided and turn off
when it is disabled.
Music that is provided to outside lines while they are
on hold can be disabled and enabled by attendant
action.
l
Dial 1 to enable (Al LED turns on).
Dial 2 to disable (Al LED turns off).
1. Press ITCM.
l
2. Dial # 0 4.
4. Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
3 . Press Al (top, left-hand programmable button) to
toggle feature on and off. Associated light will turn
LCD MESSAGING
6. Dial all two-digit codes necessary to enter the
message.
A message can be set at any station in the system to
be displayed by any calling LCD speakerphone. Two
standard messages are provided at locations 1 and 2
by system default. The attendant can create up to ten
custom messages (or eight plus the default
7. Dial
and repeat steps 3
7.
Examples:
messages) as needed. If a non-verbal response to an
intercom call or to a secure off-hook voice announce
(SOHVA) is to be provided for station use, one or
more LCD messages can be stored as appropriate
response messages.
l
For message “I am busy”
l
l
For message “Call Back Later’
l
232456561222242655125324
843575X
l
If default locations 1 and 2 have been cleared,
return to default messages as follows
1. Press ITCM.
2. Dial
0 5.
l
Dial 10 to obtain default message “BACK AT”.
3 . Dial
1
0 for message number.
l
Dial 20 to obtain default message “CALL”.
4 . Dial #to clear current message.
8. Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
5 . Refer to Table
and compose the
9 . Make list of stored messages and location
numbers to station users.
message (16 digits maximum).
STATION NAMES
Dial #to clear current name.
Stations can be assigned individual names or category
names which will be displayed by a calling LCD
speakerphone. Typical names could be TECH-SV,
4 .
5 .
Refer to Table
and compose station
name (7 digits maximum).
SALES J.
1. Press
2 . Dial
etc.
Dial all two-digit codes necessary for new station
name.
6 .
0 6
Dial
for next station and repeat steps 3
7.
7.
3. Select station to be programmed by dialing station
port number 10 67.
8
Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Table
Character Codes
CHAR
CODE
I
CHAR
CODE
CHAR
CODE
A
I
I
H
I
42
43
h
i
45
46
:
1
29
01
I
K
L
M
N
k
I
m
I on
04
05
53
61
56
64
4
5
83
91
92
93
13
v
W
X
W
X
95
96
16
Y
5 - 1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
66-083
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL ACCOUNTING (SMDA) PRINTOUT
The attendant can command the system to print
several different types of reports and to delete all
stored SMDA records.
l
Dial 5 #for automatic reports.
Dial 6 #to print all records.
l
l
l
Dial 7 #to delete SMDA records.
1. Press
Dial 0 # for Departmental Call Distribution (DCD)
report.
2 . Dial
# 0 7.
3. Choose report to be printed.
l
Dial 8 to obtain the number of free records
remaining in the system.
l
Dial 1
for station report.
l
Dial 9 to abort printing.
l
Dial 2 # for line report.
4. Press MNTR (SPKR) to end.
l
Dial 3 #for SMDA department report.
Dial 4 #for account code report.
l
SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING
The attendant can command the system to present
alarm codes on the station display. This feature is
available to any LCD speakerphone when provided for
by class of service programming.
.
Communications difficulty between
a
station and
the common equipment The number of parity
errors, up to 256, and the affected station port
are shown.
Display shows: “xxx PAR/N Pxx
To display alarm codes,
.
Data printer off -line.
Display shows: “PRINTER OFF LINE”
l
Press and hold
for 5 seconds. The following
status reports will be displayed:
After the information has been shown on the
l
Station disconnected from station port for more
than five minutes. Month, day, station port
number, and station extension number are
shown.
display, the
disappears until another alarm
Display shows:
Pxx
A”
DIRECT INWARD STATION DIALING
The direct inward station dialing (DISD) feature allows
an external party to call an intercom station directly
without assistance by the attendant if the call is made
over a line programmed for that purpose.
timeout period, busy tone is given followed by
dial tone.
NOTE: The system will return the caller to
dial
tone two additional
and then drop the line.
To make a
call from an outslde telephone,
line. Hear tone.
busy called station is
of hunt group, call is
routed to
station in hunt group if available;
call is camped-on at dialed station. Hunt
1. Call is made on
2.
is answered, ask for transfer to desired
station. If ringing stops and dial tone sounds again,
dial station extension number.
group not followed in case of RNA.
If invalid extension number is dialed, error tone is
sounded before
dial tone is returned.
station is id/e, confirmation tone is
mistake in dialing is made, caller can dial
for new
sounded and called station
does not answer within transfer recall timeout
period, call is returned to dial tone.
If called station has call forward feature set,
forward station rings.
called station
dial tone.
NOTE: The system will return the caller
dial
line.
tone
additional times and then drop
extension number dialing is not completed within
programmed dial time limit, call is routed to
called station is busy, call is placed on hold and
camped-on at busy station.
assist station if available; otherwise, line is dropped.
camp-on is not answered within transfer recall
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operation
Volume Con t r ol
Volume Con t r ol
But t on s
S p ea k er
T A P
But t on
Buttons
But t on
But t on
But t on
P r ogr a mma b le
But t on s
Ir
Hold
But t on
P r ogr a mma b le
But t on s
I nt
But t on
Ringer
Volume Control
Alp h a n umer ic D isp la y
Volume
Con t r ol
H a n d se t
S p ea k er
\
-Programmable
0
0
But t on s
-K eypa d But t ons
- I n t e r c o m
But t on
But t on s
But t on
Figure
Controls and Indicators
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operatisn
l
66-083
SECTION 3
SYSTEM OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
FEATURE DIALING CODE NUMBERING PLAN
I
I
FEATURE
DIALING CODES
All Call Paae
87
Attendant Calling
0
Automatic Redialing
Programmed Button
Background Music On
off
Automatic
Call Back
Activate
Cancel
Ext.,
Ext.,
6
Station-to-Station
Messaging
A c t i v a t e
Cancel
7
# 7, Ext.
LCD Messaging
Set
- 0 )
Cancel
Personal
Cancel
All Calls
Cancel
02
05. Ext.
# 05
Call Forward
5, Ext.
I Park
191
I
I
call
Directed.
4, Ext
Call Waiting Tone
Send
I
Do Not Disturb
set
Programmed Button
Programmed Button
,
I
Executive Override
I
External Page
89
MUTE
MUTE
Handsfree Answer
Inhibit
Cancel
H o l d
Manual
HOLD
HOLD, HOLD
90, Ext.
90
Exclusive
Direct
Hold Piiup
Continued on next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
System
NUMBERING PLAN
continued
DIALING CODES
FEATURE
80
Line Answer From Any Station
9
Line Group Access
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
81
82
83
Enable tine
Enable Line Group
HOLD
(Group
# 8
Line Queuing
8
Cancel
88
Meet Me Answer (Paging)
Message Waiting
3, Ext.
Set
Cancel From
Cancel On tine
Retrieve Message
# 3, Ext.
HOLD
Night Transfer
(Attendant Station )
On
Olf
# 03 (Al )
Set Tone 1
4
Personal
Ringing Tones
I
Pulse/Tone Switching
#
Saved Number
Redial
Programmed Button
Observing
Speed Dial
Station
1 - o
01-99
I
(Last Dialed Number)
Announce
Unbbok
Zone Page
zone2
06
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Operatisn
66-083
RINGER VOLUME CONTROL
DISPLAY INTENSITY
The intensity (brightness and contrast) of the liquid
crystal display readout, included on some digital
telephones, can be adjusted to a desired operating
level at any time that the telephone is idle and on-hook.
Each station has a ringer volume control. Depending
upon the model, the ringer control is located on the
front edge, rear edge, or bottom of the telephone.
Adjust the control lever to OFF, LOW or HIGH volume
as desired.
To adjust the display Intensity,
l
Press and hold the MUTE button until the desired
intensity is achieved.
STATUS INDICATORS AND TONE
SEQUENCES
The following pages describe the light and
patterns associated with system operation.
NOTE: The values shown are typical. They are
provided for illustration purposes on/y.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERCOM CALL PROGRESS TONES
(Heard through handset
or over
speaker)
Dial Tone
Continuous on
Called station ring-back
One sec. on
and 3 sec. off.
I
I
Base level
80 msec. tone burst
sounded once
Error tone
entry
msec.toneburst
sounded three times
I
I
I
I
All-callandzonepaging
tone
80 msec. tone burst
followed by 280 msec.
tone burst
I
Busy tone
Override feature
notallowed
530 msec. tone bursts
sounded continuously
transferfeature
not allowed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
waiting tone
station in
Three 80 msec. tone bursts
sounded once
140
burst
disturb mode
sounded twice every
1.5 sec.
260 msec. tone burst
sounded once
busy feature on
1
System is awaiting
80 msec. tone bursts sounded
continuously
memory dial number
or key mapping entry
after location is specified
Override feature on
warning tone
Six 100
tone bursts
sounded for 1.5 sec.
tone
tone
Dual
tone
.
sounded 1
off
dial tone
381 Hz tone sounded
continuously
I
confirmation tone
busy/error tone
Two 125 sec. bursts
of 381 Hz tone sounded once
Three 500 msec. bursts
of 381 Hz tone sounded once
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LINE SELECT LIGHTS
Idle
Steady off
Ringing
Continuous flash
(560 msec. on
560 msec. off)
I
I
Steady on with wink off
(2.3 sec. on 70 msec. off)
In use-your station
In use-other station
Steady on
Winking with repeative off periods
On hold-your station
On hold other station
(winking rate
560 msec. off)
Continuous winking
(490 msec. on
Steady on
70 msec. off)
Exclusive hold
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
call timeout your
station
Flutter with repeative off periods
(flutter rate 560
off)
Held call timeout other
station
Continuous flutter
(70 msec. on 70
off)
MESSAGE WAITING LIGHT
Continuous flash (560 msec. on
560 msec. off)
Message Wafting
I
I
I
INTERCOM LIGHT
In use-your station
Steady on with wink off
(2.3 sec. on 70 msec. off)
Auto redial active
Messaging display
Flutter with repeative off periods
Night mode
Station 10 and 12
(flutter rate
560 msec. off)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System
66-083
1
1
5
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
66-083
CHAPTER6
MAINTENANCE
FUSE LOCATION
system is protected against short circuit damage
TECHNICAL
AND REPAIR
by a slow-blow fuse located on the right side of the
common equipment cabinet. Always replace the fuse
with one of the same value and type, otherwise,
equipment damage could result.
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
Should you experience difficulty with installation,
checkout, or programming, and have made an attempt
to isolate the problem using information provided
herein; or should you encounter problems at a later
date which cannot be resolved by referring to this
l
l
l
4-Line,
Base Unit
Base Unit
1 A, 250V Slow-Blow
250V Slow-Blow
manual, call the
Technical Service staff.
They can be reached at l-800-366-8224 between the
hours of 8:00 AM and 8:00 PM Eastern time, Monday
through Friday.
1 B-Line, 32-Station Base Unit
250V Slow-Blow
When calling for technical assistance, you should be
at the job site and you should have in your
WIRING
Refer to Chapter 3, Sectlon 4, Checkout and Failure
Isolation, for instructions for testing the system wiring
and components for possible failure.
possession, as
a
minimum, an accurate volt-ohm
meter and a copy of this manual.
REPAIR SERVICE
STATION WALL MOUNTING
If your common equipment cabinet or an individual
station needs repair, it may be returned to Comdial.
Comdial will, at their option, either repair the defective
equipment or replace it with a remanufactured unit.
No conversion is required to prepare a digital
telephone to be hung on the wall. Two keyhole
shaped slots are available on the bottom housing
which enable a digital telephone to be either mounted
This repair will be done for a fixed charge.
For
directly on a wall using two,
screws
information on this charge, please call or write to the
address given below.
(obtained locally), or mount on a wall jack cover plate.
if mounted using a wail jack cover plate, an AT&T
type 6308 wail plate is recommended for best
results.
Comdiai
P.O. Box 7266
Charlottesville, VA 22906
Attention: Repair Department
Telephone: (804) 978-2400
l-800-877-4448
1. If
within
screws are used, thread them into the wall
of the surface. Refer to Figure 6-l
for the spacing dimensions.
2. Turn the telephone over and remove the plastic tab
that is molded into the housing. It is located at the
lower right-hand comer of the housing.
When returning equipment for repair, pack it carefully
to prevent damage. Any damages during shipment
will be the responsibility of the purchaser. The
equipment should be shipped freight or postage
prepaid. The shipping address is:
3. Position the keyhole shaped holes in the bottom of
the station over the
studs. Slide the station down until a slight click is
screws or the cover plate
Comdiai
1180 Seminole Trail
Charlottesville, VA 22901
Attention: Repair Department
4
Insert the plastic tab that was removed from the
lower housing in step 2 into the handset
This tab provides a secure retention for the handset
when it is hung up.
To remove the station, lift up to unsnap both screws
or studs from the bottom housing, and iii the
station away from the wall.
5 .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Screws
Wall Plate
,
NOTE: AT&T
Wall
is Recommended
For Secure Mount.
6”
Figure
Station Wall Mounting Details
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
PUBLICATION INDEX
A
C
Abandoned Hold Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Clips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Cable Requirements, Station
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Power Connection And System Grounding
Access Denied
Call Announce
Handsfree Answerback . . . . . . . .2-3
. . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
4-48
4-76
Call Costing And SMDA Reports
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-3
4-67
4-71
Account Code Button
Account Code Display
Account Code Operation
Call Costing Diagram
Call Costing Table Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Costing Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-70
Account Codes
4-75
Call Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forward Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Account Codes Positive Verification
Add-On Expansion Module Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
3-23
Call Forward On Busy/Ring
Call Forwarding Personal
Call Forwarding On All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Origination Denied
No Answer
. . . . . . . . . 4-32
Add-On Expansion Modules
All-Call And Zone Paging
All-Call/Zone Page Button
Terminal Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1, 435, 5-7
4-45
4-55
4-73
5-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
4 4 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park Orbit Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Park Recall Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answer Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answering Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answering Intercom Calls
Answering Outside Calls
Area Code Band Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Pick-up Answering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Pickup
Call Pickup
.
4-69
2-1
Group
Area Paging Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Transfer
Call Transfer
Screened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unscreened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assist Button
Distinctive Ringing
Attendant Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
4-57
4-78
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Office Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Waiting Tone
Calling Station Identification On BLF
Attendant Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audible Monitoring
5-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
4-42
Office Lines
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-l
5
Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - l
1
Central Message Desk
4-26
Automatic Call-Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
Character Dialing Codes Chart
. . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Call-Back Button
4-45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cheok Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dialing
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 5-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class Of Service Program Printout
Class Of Service Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
. . .
. . . . . . . . .2-5
Transfer To Intercom
Transfer To tine
2-2
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Class Of Service Programming (From Main Station)
Class Of Service Programming (From
Automatic Hold For Intercom
Automatic Pause Insertion
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
. . . . .
Common Audible And Auxiliary Ringing Interface
.2-2
Common Audible Interface
Common Audible Ringer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Automatic Privacy
Automatic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-2.4-19
.2-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Redial Button, Programming
. . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Common Equipment, Station And Line Connections
Communications Procedures, Data Communications
. . .
. . .
3 - l
1
Automatic Station Relocation
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transfer Of Voice Mall
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conferencing
Conferencing
Conferencing
Conferencing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-55
Auxiliary Equipment Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unsupervised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Interface Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
4-15
Auxiliary Lines
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Ringer Interface
Configuration, Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-78
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration, Add-On Expansion Module . . . . . . . . 3-24
B
Configuration, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
4-22
.4-5
Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration, Station
Basic Key Service
Battery Back-Up
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration, System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection, AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections. Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.3-3
Battery Back-Up Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLF Lights
5-27
.3-5
Block Programming
Button Assignment, Default
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections, Power Failure Station . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Connections, Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
Button Mapping
4 4 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
and Indicators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-l
8
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66483
Index
D
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Paging Connection
External Paging Connection
External Paging Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-7
3-29
. . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Line Port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Communications Interconnection Diagram
. . . . .
F
Data Device Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failure Isolation
Data Printer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Security Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-64
4-34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC Rules And Regulations
Feature Code Numbering Plan
3-32
5-19
Feature Inhibit
1
Default
System, Line and Station
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Five-Party Conference
Default Button Assignment
4-41
Flash/Recall
Default Functional Program
Default Toll Restriction
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-l 0,436
Flexible Ringing Assignments
. . . . . . . . . 2-10
Flexible Ringing Assignments Of PA Port
Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete SMDA Records By Attendant
2-6
4-8
. . . .
2 - l
1
Flexible Station And Line Class Of Service Control
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Station Numbering Plan
Departmental Calling Distribution Report
Full Button Programmability Of Features
2-10
Departmental Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - l
1
Fuse Location
l-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-l
f-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Description, Common Equipment
Description Of System Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
Description, Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
General Check
Designated Programmable Buttons
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information, Programming
Dial
0
For System Attendant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
4-53
l-8
General Specifications
Grounding, System
Group Call Pick-Up
Dial Time Limit,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Time Limit, Calf Costing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-73
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions
Direct Department Calling
4-31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-l
1
Handsfree Answer Inhibit
Direct Department Calling (Access Codes)
. . . . . . . . 4-23
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
Hardware Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-3
Direct Department Calling With DCD
Direct Inward Station Dialing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset Interface
4-29
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hold Recall Feature
Direct Station Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-9
2, 5-4
Holding Calls
Direct Station Hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Station Selection Programmable
. . . . . . . . . . .2-9
I
Discard Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assist Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-73
4-53
4-53
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preference
I Hold And I Use Indications
2-11
2-l 1,439
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Idle
Industry/Regulatory
Condition
Standards
Display, Account Code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-76
5-21
3-31
Display Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Of Costed Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation
4-34
.2-9
. . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Installation, Add-On Expansion Module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Software
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-65
Integrated Call Costing
Intercom Call Progress Tones
444
Intercom Calling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Hunt Group
2-l
442
5-12
.2-9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
2-11
i-1
Intercom tight
Intercom
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming
Timeout
Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Line Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key
Configuration
3-14
E
End-To-End Signafling On Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
End-To-End Signafling On
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.2-9
3-29
L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
Equipment Required, Data Communications
LCD Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exception Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Support
Line Access
2-12
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold System-Wide Enable/Disable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-l
.2-12,5-l
4-14
2
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Executive/Attendant
Expansion Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Tones For Automatic Dialing
Override . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answer From Any Station (Night Mode)
Line Buttons
. . . . . .
External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration
l-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66-083
Index
Line Connections
Option Installation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Originating Denied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
2-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Connections
408 Expansion Module
. . . . . . . . 3-23
Line COS Menu Selections
Line Default
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-88
Outline Dimensions
Common Equipment
. . . . . . . . . l-5
Outline Dimensions -Station Equipment
. . . . . . . . .
l-6
Outside Line Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
.5-2
4-47
4-48
Line Group Access
Line Group Button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P
PA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-12
Line Group Queue Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pause Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.5-7
Line Monitoring
Line Names
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
2-12
5-25
4-19
Line Preselection
Line Select Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBWCENTREWCO
Compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
PC Operation, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-84
Line To Line Port Reassignment
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personalized Ringing Tone
. . . . . . . . . .
Pooled Line Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location Of Keys On Telephone Faceplate
. . . . . . . . 4 4 9
2-13
4-19
4-51
Port Reassignment, Line To Line
Port Reassignment, Station To Station
M
Main Menu Selections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-87
. . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance
Making Calls
Manual Hold
Manual Scope
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Transfer
Power Requirements
Prime Line Automatic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.5-2
l-8
2-13
4-36
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
i-2
4-41
Prime
Line/Group/Intercom
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping, Button
Privacy
Designated Programmable Button . . . . . . . . 2-14
Master Clear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-3
Privacy Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meet-Me Answer Page
Memory Retention
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-38
Batteries
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy Release/Brokerage Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Menu Descriptions
4-87
4-26
Private Lines (Access Denied) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
l-9
Message Wait Originate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Buttons
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Message Waiting Control
Message Waiting Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.5-5
5-26
Programmable Direct Station Selection/Busy Light Field
Programming, Assist Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 2-14
5-13
Messaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.5-5
Programming,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - l
1
Messaging, LCD
Modular
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming, Automatic Redial Button
. . . . . . . . . . 5-12
And Jacks
2-13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
Mounting
Considerations
Programming
Mounting Dimensions
Mounting Procedure
.3-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming, Response Message Button
. . . . . . . . 5-12
Programming, Secure Off-Hook Voice Announce
Originate Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.5-13
5-12
Multiple Intercom Button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming, Station Speed dial
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Interface
Music Interface
Music On Hold
Music-On-Hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming, Station User
5 - l
1
Programming, System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming, System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
System-Wide
Enable/Disable
. . . . . . . 2-13
Pubiiitions
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
l-2
Mute
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Pulse/Tone Switchable
Answer Inhibit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Night Transfer (Of Ringing)
. . . . . . .
Non-Square System
Non-Square System Reference Record
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 4 1
Remote Programming And Administration
. . . . . . . . 2-14
. . . . . . . . . .
Remote Programming Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Remote Programming, VDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-84
Office Code Band Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
On-Hook Dialing
Response Message Button, Programming
. . . . . . . . 5-12
Operating
Response Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
l-9
Operaion. Account
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ringer
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation, Attendant Station
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ringer Volume Control
5-21
Operation, Departmental Station
Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation,
Speakerphone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-l
S
Wall
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
6
Massaging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-40
5-21
2-17
Record
Off-Hook
Secure Off-Hook Voice Announce. Answering
Off-Hook Voice Announce Sutton . . . . . . . . .
Announce
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
. . . . . . . . . .
lndiirs
Subdued Ringing
Tone Sequences
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secure Off-Hook
Announce Disable
Announce Groups
Announce,
. . . . . . . .
. . . . .
Calls . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Reports
System
Checkout And Failure Isolation
Off-Hook
Self
Announce
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.4-5
configuration
COS Menu Selections
2-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l
System Features, Description
3-27
.3-26
5-27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Groundii
System
and
. . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System operating Procedures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Programming
5-22
System Ringing Patterns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Speed Diil
Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31
System Status Indicator
2-16
4-22
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
connections . . . . . . .
-406 Expansion
Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tandem Attendant
2-17
. . . . . .
Station
station
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
.1-g
Tenant
u
Terminations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-62
l-7
Station Images
Station Message
Station Message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Department Numbers
. . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
2 1 7
2-17
2-17
2-16
4-74
. . . . . .
Message Detail
Printout
. . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
can
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tods And
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
U
. . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
l - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W
DisplayTerminalProgramming
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Voice
Automatic Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zone Call
zone
Sutton
. . . . . . . . . . .
Zone Paging (Via Station Speakers)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
READERS COMMENT FORM
issue No,
Addendum
Publication No.
Title
How did you use this publication?
Product familiarization
Training
Maintenance
Installation
Other
Please check specific criticism(s), give page
Clarification on
explain below:
Error on
Deletion on page(s)
Addition on page(s)
Comments:
Thank you for your
If reply is
check:
Date
Name
Your Function
Company
Address
Zip
City, State
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT
CHARLOTTESVILLE, VA 22906
I
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT
P 0 BOX 7266
CHARLOTTESVILLE VA 22906-7266
I III I
I
I
I I I l lIII l l
I I
I
I
IIII l l III I III II Ill
I
I
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
i
Fold
I
I
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Made
in the USA
TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN
Date: January
TAB 099
SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS FOR
THE DigiTech DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM
This bulletin discusses the following software enhancements and feature additions to the DigiTech telephone system:
l
Enhanced SMDA reporting
l
l
Expanded options for account code entry
Support for Caller ID service
Availability of these enhancements is as follows:
BASE UNIT PRODUCT CODE
GO408 All Revisions
GO81 6 All Revisions
All Revisions
SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE PRODUCT CODE
SO408 Rev. 13a and later
SO816 Rev. 13a and later
S1632 Rev. 13a and later
.
Note: Due to the addition of a new account code table,
follow these
when
software
the
1. Save current database
2. Install new software
3 .
Master clear system
4. Restore database
5 .
Perform additional programming, if desired
FEATURE AND BENEFIT
This section describes the major features and benefits of this software enhancement, including programming information.
FEATURE
BENEFIT
SMDA Reporting
Through VDT
Programmlng and
Per-Station SMDA
A menu selection has been added so that SMDA reports can now be requested from VDT
programming and can be sent to either port A or port B.
capture SMDA reports; as well, SMDA station reports can now be requested per station. Note,
however, that only one station report can be requested at a time. The Class of Service
programming requirements for SMDA reporting are as follows:
This feature can be used remotely to
1.
Press
Dial 07 for SMDA reports
for station reports
Dial station number and then press
# 7 4 6
to enter COS programming
2 .
3. Dial
1
4 .
or press # for all stations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB 099
DigiTech System Software Enhancements
FEATURE
BENEFITS
SMDA Reports
VDT COS
(cont.)
Enter COS programming
1.
2 .
3 .
4 .
Enter
1
for “System COS”
Enter 8 for “SMDA Programming”
Enter 11 for “SM DA Reports”
Enter selection for desired report:
press 1 for Selected Station Reports
press 2 for Station Reports
press 3 for Account Reports
press 4 for Line Reports
press 5 for Departmental Reports
press 6 for All Detail Records
press
7
for Departmental Calling Distribution Reports
press 8 to Display Number of Free Records
press 9 to Delete Records (After Next Print)
press 10 to Start Printing Report
press 11 to Stop Printing Report
press 12 to Return to Previous Menu
SMDA Record
Storage Capacity
DigiTech systems have the following SMDA record storage capacities:
SO408 800 records
SO816 = 1600 records
= 1600 records
SMDA Reports
Refer to Figure 3 in this Technical Advisory Bulletin (under the Caller ID heading) for an example
Caller ID Information of an SMDR printout with Caller ID information for incoming calls.
Forced Account
Code Option
ACCOUNT CODES AND ACCOUNT CODE VERIFICATION
Account Code feature has been enhanced so that account code entry may be either
or optional for outgoing calls. When account code verification is enabled, the system compares
the account code entered by a station user with the programmed account entries.
forced
If the system
does not find a match and the forced account code feature is enabled through class of service
programming, the system prevents further dialing until the user enters a matching account code.
For account code verification to work properly, the system programmer must maintain (within the
system) a current list of valid account codes.
When a station user activates redial and auto-redial features for outgoing calls, the system will
automatically
the last account entered at that station. Additionally, users may enter an
account code before seizing a line for an outgoing call.
ACCOUNT CODE LENGTH, VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE LENGTH AND
VALID ACCOUNT CODES
Account Code Length defines the number of digits that a user must enter before the system
accept the code. Account code length can range from 3 to 16 digits but may never be set lower
than the current Verified Account Code Length.
will
Verified Account Code Length defines the number of digits that will be verified before a verified
account code will be accepted. As well, Verified Account Code Length defines the number of
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Software Enhancements
TAB 099
FEATURE
(cont.)
BENEFITS
valid account codes that can be stored (as shown in the following table). Be aware that when you
change the Verified Account Code Length, the list of Valid Account Codes is emptied.
Account Codes
1000
4
400
266
200
160
133
114
100
ACCOUNT CODE MESSAGE DISPLAY TIME
When account codes are enabled, LCD telephones will prompt users with an “account code”
message, which is cleared at the end of the programmable display time. If the account codes
are forced and the call is outgoing, then the line is dropped at the end of the display time if a valid
account code is not entered. Valid range for the display time is 1 to 20 seconds. If display
duration is ever set for zero seconds, time-out for account code entry prior to the line being
dropped defaults to 5 seconds.
ACCOUNT CODES AND EMERGENCY NUMBERS
When the Forced Account Codes feature is enabled, emergency numbers may be dialed without
account code entry. You may define up to three programmable emergency numbers. Minimum
length of an emergency number is 1 digit; maximum length is 12 digits. Users may dial
emergency numbers manually, or through system speed dial, personal speed dial, last-number
redial, or automatic redial -- with or without account code entry.
ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY
Users may enter account codes after they select a line, or they may enter the code without
selecting a line at all. When a code is entered without line selection, the code will apply to any
line subsequently selected at that station for the next call attempted manually or through
automatic redial, system speed dial, personal speed dial, or last number redial.
If an Account Code button is programmed at the telephone, the user can press this button for
automatic account code entry. If no such button is programmed, the user must press
then dial 0 4. The prompt “Account Code” will appear on the top line of the telephone’s LCD.
and
The user then enters account code digits to be verified, followed by any additional digits
necessary to make up the required length of the account code.
If the system is set for Verified Account Codes, a verification attempt will be made after the entire
code has been entered. Failure by the system to verify the code will cause “Error” to display in
the LCD. The user may re-enter account code digits at this point.
If the verification attempt is
successful (or if the system does not require that the code be verified), the LCD will return to the
normal display of date and time.
A user may clear an account code stored at a programmable button by pressing the Account
Code button twice, or by pressing
0 4 SPKR.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB 099
System Software Enhancements
FEATURE
BENEFITS
Account
ACCOUNT CODF
Codes (cont.)
Account Code Feature
Verified/Non-Verified
Forced/Optional
Prompted/Non-Prompted
Prompt Display Duration
Station Exceptions to Forced
Emergency Numbers:
Valid Account Codes
:
Verified
: Optional
: Prompted
: 5 seconds
: None
: None
: None
Account Code Length
Verified Account Code Length
: 3
1.
2.
Press
# 7 4 6
to enter COS programming
Press 7 5 for SMDA programming
To set account codes,
l
Press 0 5
.
Dial number of account digits
To enter another number, press
l
then dial digits
then dial digits
To clear account codes,
l
Press 0 6
l
Dial number of account code digits
To enter another number, press
.
To enable or disable account codes,
l
Press0 7
l
Press Al to toggle the feature on and off (Al LED on = account codes enabled)
-or-
-
Press
1
to enable account codes, 2 to disable account codes
To set verified or unverified account codes,
Press 0 8
.
Press Al to toggle the feature on and off (Al LED on = verification on)
-or-
.
Press
1
to enable verification, 2 to disable verification
To set maximum account code digits,
. Press 0 9
l
Dial number of digits (3
16)
To set the account code display time,
l
Press 1 0
l
Dial
1
20 to select new display time (in seconds)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Software Enhancements
TAB 099
FEATURE
Codes
BENEFITS
STATION 10
To enable or disable the account code prompt for incoming calls,
. Press 1 1
.
Press Al to toggle feature on and off (Al LED on = feature enabled for incoming calls)
-or-
.
Press 1 to enable prompt for incoming, 2 to disable prompt for incoming
To set the number of account code digits to be verified,
l
Press 1 5
.
Dial 3
16 for number of digits to be veriiied
To set emergency numbers (which will not require account codes for dialing),
l
Press 1 6
l
Dial emergency number (up to 12 digits)
To enter another emergency number, press
l
then dial number
To clear emergency numbers,
. Press 1 7
l
Dial emergency number (up to 12 digits)
.
To clear another number, press
then dial number
3 .
4 .
Press
for configuration mode
Press 5 3 for station features
Press 3 5 for
Account Codes
To set all stations to forced account codes,
l
Press Al
l
Enter station number(s),
any, of station(s) to be “Exception(s) to Forced” (i.e., they
will have optional account codes)
To set all stations to optional account codes,
. Press A2
.
Enter station number(s),
any, of station(s) to be “Exception(s) to Optional” (i.e., they
will have forced account codes)
5 .
Enter
for configuration mode
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB 099
System Software Enhancements
FEATURE
BENEFITS
Account
Codes (cont.)
COS
1. Enter COS programming
2.
3 .
4 .
Enter 1 for system COS programming
Enter 8 for SMDA programming
Enter 6 for account codes
To set account codes,
l
Enter
If the Verified Account Code Length is 3, the system will prompt you to “Enter Account
Codes (0 999)”
1
l
l
Type in valid account code(s), delimited by commas
If you enter fewer than three digits, the system will assume leading zeros
l
If the Veriiied Account Length is between 4 and 16, the system will respond “Table is
Full” (if all possible account codes are stored) or “Enter Account Code”
l
l
If the prompt “Enter Account Code” appears, type in only one valid account code
(the system will respond with “Command Accepted“ and will allow subsequent
account code entry)
If you type in more or less than the number of digits specified as the verified
account code length, the system will respond with
l
** Command Rejected
l
**
To clear account codes,
l
Enter 2
l
If the Verified Account Code Length is 3, the system will prompt you to “Enter Account
Codes (0 999)
Type in valid account code(s) to be deleted, delimited by commas
If you enter fewer than three digits, the system will assume leading zeros
l
If the Verified Account Length is between 4 and
Empty” (if there are no valid account codes in the
the system will respond “Table is
or “Enter Account Code”
l
If the prompt “Enter Account Code” appears, type in only one valid account code
(the system will respond with “Command Accepted” and will allow immediate
subsequent account code entry)
l
If you type in more or less than the number of digits specified as the verified
account code length, the system will respond with
l
** Command Rejected
l
**
To enable optional account codes (with verification),
Enter3
To enable optional account codes (without verification),
l
Enter4
To enable forced account codes (with verification),
. Enter 5
To enable forced account codes (without verification),
Enter 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Software Enhancements
, TAB 099
FEATURE
BENEFITS
V D T C O S
P R O -
_
(cont.)
To disable account codes,
l
Enter7
To enable account code display for incoming calls,
l
Enter8
To disable account code display for incoming calls,
l
Enter9
To enable account codes display for outgoing calls,
l
Enter 1 0
To disable account code display for outgoing calls,
. Enter 1 1
To set the account code message display time,
. Enter 1 2
.
Type in display time (l-20 seconds)
To set the maximum account code length,
. Enter 1 3
l
Type in account code length (3
to the number of digits to verify
16 digits) -- this number must be greater than or equal
To set the number of
code digits to verify,
l
Enter 1 4
l
Enter Y to prompt “Change Deletes All Verify Account Codes”
“Are you sure you want to do this (Y/N)
.
Enter account code length to verify (3
equal to maximum account code length
16 digits) -- this number must be less than or
To set emergency numbers (which will not require account codes for dialing),
l
Enter
1
5 (If there are already three emergency numbers stored, system will respond
“Table is Full,” in which case you will need to clear emergency numbers before
entering a new number -- see below)
l
Type in the emergency number (1
12 digits)
To clear previously stored emergency numbers,
l
Enter 1 6 (If there are no emergency numbers already stored, system will respond
“Table is Empty”)
Type in the emergency number to be cleared (1
12 digits)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Software Enhancements
TAB 099
FEATURE
BENEFITS
Account
Codes (cont.)
To display a list of stored emergency numbers,
l
Enter
1
7 (if there are no emergency numbers already stored, the system will respond
“Table is Empty”)
To return to the previous menu during programming,
l
Enter 1 8
To print out all information pertaining to account code programming,
l
Enter COS programming
Enter for System COS
l
1
Enter 6 for COS Data Printout
l
Enter 7 for Toll Restriction Data Printout; the system will print the status of the
following
parameters:
Verified/Non-Verified
Account Code Length
Verified Account Code Length
Account Code Display Duration
Account Code Display for Incoming -- Enable/Disable
Account Code Display for Outgoing -- Enable/Disable
Emergency Numbers
Valid Account Codes
l
Enter 5 for All Station COS Data Printout; the system will print the status of “Forced
Account Code at Station”
Note: If Account Code Length is greater than eight
SMDA reports by
station and by account will print in a two-line format. Also, SMDR and
SMDA reports will include the Caller ID number in the number field for
incoming calls. The Caller ID number will be
distinguish it from outgoing digits.
by a slash to
GENERAL INFORMATION
Caller ID data is sent from the Central Off ice along lines assigned to the Caller ID service.
ID information is displayed at a station only if the station is assigned to the Caller ID service, and
then only for Caller ID lines at that station which:
Support for
Caller ID
Caller
l
ring audibly
l
are answered by pressing the ringing line
are transferred to the station
.
Caller ID data for a call is received at a station between the first and second rings. Through
programming, you can enable the first ring for a line assigned to Caller ID to be either audible or
silent. Selecting the “silent” option insures that the Caller ID data is displayed prior to ringing,
which nearly eliminates the loss of Caller ID data due to premature answering.
AUTOMATICALLY DIALING CALLER ID NUMBERS
Station users may automatically retrieve and dial the last Caller ID number displayed at a station
by using a preprogrammed SAVE recovery button. Because you can store the local area code
and up to 100 local office codes, ten-digit Caller ID numbers can automatically be transformed
into a
format (seven-, eight-, and eleven-digit Caller ID numbers are already
and
do not need to be transformed).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Software Enhancements
TAB 099
FEATURE
BENEFITS
INSTALLATION NOTES
ID (cont.)
All Caller ID features require the delivery of Caller ID data to the input Port B. This port must be
configured to match the output of the Caller ID decoder device. The recommended configuration
is 9600 baud, with eight data bits and one stop bit. You can configure the port either from the
terminal Class of Service programming menus, or from station 10 or 12.
You have the option to provide Caller ID Distribution through the
port (Port B), over which
SMDR information is delivered. Caller ID Distribution is in the form of messages which specify
the Caller ID data for lines with incoming calls, and identify the stations answering such lines.
The data is in ASCII, formatted for use with PC-based application programs.
Figure 1 shows system configuration. Figure 2 illustrates the Printer-to-Port B connection.
To C. 0.
Lines to Common
Equipment
CrossConnects
.
To 120V AC
Outlet
Supplied
Cable
Modular Cord
.
CommonEquipmeni
.
.
.
.
.
l
.
PWR
IN
RS-232 RS-232
OUT
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Ports
CID08 Caller ID
I
Figure 1. System Configuration
Caller ID Unit
TD
Common Equipment
3
RS-232 Data Port
B
RS-232 OUT
MALE
SG
3
S G
-sub
O-Pin
MALE
D-sub
6
7
8
9
Printer PIN
Solder Cup Side
Figure 2. Caller ID Unit and Printer to Common Equipment Through Data Port B
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB 099
System Software Enhancements
FEATURE
BENEFITS
STATION
Caller ID (cont.)
1.
2.
Press
# 7 4 6
to enter COS programming
To assign Caller ID lines,
l
l
Press47
Dial line number(s)
3 . To assign Caller ID stations,
l
Press 5 3 for Station Features
Press 3 6 for Caller ID stations
Dial station number(s)
l
l
4 . To set the Audible First Ring feature,
l
Press 1 7
l
Press 0 1 for Audible First Ring Option
Press 1 to silence the first ring on Caller ID lines
l
l
Press 2 to enable Audible First Ring
5 .
To set the Caller ID Distribution feature,
. Press 1 7
l
l
Press 0 2 for the Caller ID Distribution Option
Press 1 to disable Caller ID Distribution
l
Press 2 to enable Caller ID Distribution to Port B
6 .
Press
for configuration mode
1. Enter COS programming
2 .
3 .
Enter 2 for Line COS
Enter 1 3 for Caller ID assignments
To assign Caller ID service
lines,
l
l
Enter 1
Dial line number(s)
To remove Caller ID service from lines,
Enter2
l
Dial line number(s)
To assign Caller ID service to stations,
. Enter3
l
Dial station number(s)
To remove Caller ID service from stations,
Enter4
.
Dial station number(s)
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Software Enhancements
TAB 099
FEATURE
BENEFITS
VDT
ID (cont.)
To define your local area code,
l
Enter 5
l
Enter Y if displayed area code is correct
or
.
N if displayed area code is incorrect, then enter the correct three-digit area
To define your local office codes,
l
Enter 6
.
Enter 1 to define a new local office code, then enter six sigits or five digits plus a
character
l
Enter 2 to delete the local off ice code last displayed
Enter 3 to display the next office code
Enter 4 to display all local off ice codes in list
Enter 5 to return to previous menu
l
l
l
To set the Audible first Ring option,
Enter7
l
Enter 0 to silence first ring on Caller ID lines
or
Enter
l
1
to enable Audible First Ring
To set the
ID Distribution option,
l
Enter8
l
Enter 0 to disable Caller ID Distribution
Enter to enable Caller ID Distribution to SMDR port
To return to previous menu,
l
1
l
Enter9
To set terminal printout of line and station Caller ID assignment status,
l
Enter COS programming
Enter for System COS
Enter 6 for COS data printout
l
.
1
l
l
.
Enter 3 for ALL line COS data
Enter 4 for SELECTED line COS data, then enter line number
Enter 5 for ALL station COS data
.
Enter 6 for SELECTED COS data, then enter station number
Caller ID Records
SMDR Printouts
Figure 3 (following page) provides an example of an SMDR printout with Caller ID information for
incoming calls (preceded by a slash in the “Called or Calling
column).
Continued on next page . . .
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SystemSoftwareEnhancements
TAB 099
Called or
Calling #
call
cost
Sta
#
Llne
#
Date
Time
call
length
time
1234567890123456
99736243
3437
0.51
1000
12
12
0.1
0.2
NOANS
0.1
3
1
1
1
3437
10
4
1 O/l
1 O/l
1
01 :oo
01 :oo
NOANS
0. 1
. O
10
10
10
4
0.2
3694
$
$
0.00
0.00
1
0.2
(1)outgoingcall
(2)outgoingcall
(3)unansweredincomingcall, withcallerID
(4) answered incoming call, with caller ID
(5)unansweredincomingcall, withoutcallerID
(6)answeredincomingcall, withoutcallerID
(7) answered incoming
call, with caller ID
(8) unanswered incoming
call, without caller ID
Figure 3. Sample SMDR Printout
1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Made
in the USA
TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN
Date: JUNE
SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS FOR
THE DIGITECH DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM
This bulletin discusses the software enhancements and feature additions for the DigiTech digital telephone system that
are available with software releases 10 and 11 A.
Software release 10 provides the following enhancements:
l
Additional dial time for the
option
l
l
Changed defaulted first choice signalling style for intercom calls
Supports both on-hook and off -hook call announcing from speakerphones
Enhanced secure off -hook voice announce operation
Expanded personal ring tone choice
l
l
l
Simplified hybrid operation
l
Support for DigiTech telephones
a revision letter of I or later
Software release
provldes all of the above enhancements plus the followlng addltlonal ones:
l
Enhanced automatic call back
Support for digital single-line proprietary telephone
Support for voice processing system
Availability of these enhancements is as follows:
SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE PRODUCT CODE
SO408 Rev. a and later
SYSTEM
CO408
BASE UNIT PRODUCT CODE
GO408 All Revisions
SO81 6 Rev. 11 a and later
S1632 Rev. 11 a and later
C O 8 1
Cl632
6
GO81 6 All Revisions
G1632 All Revisions
FEATURE AND BENEFIT
The major feature and benefit of these software enhancements are per the following discussion.
BENEFIT
FEATURE
With this software release, the digital telephone system provides an additional dial time limit for
the Direct Inward Station Dialing (DISD) option. When a caller does not finish dialing an
extension number within the programmed dial time limit, the system routes the call to the assist
Additional dlaltlme
for the
option
station if one is programmed;
it drops the line. Previous software provided dial time
limit choices of and 15 seconds. This software release adds a 30 second dial time limit
to the list of programmable choices.
Intercom calls can be tone signalled or voice signalled. The first choice in signalling is
programmable; however, previous software defaulted the choice to voice first signalling. This
software release changes the default setting to the tone first choice.
Changed defaulted
first
style for Intercom
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB09 1
BENEFIT
FEATURE
,
With previous software, users were required to lift the handset of a speakerphone before they
both
and off-hook could make a voice
intercom call. This software release allows a station user to perform
call announcing from either a on-hook or an-off-hook call announce from a speakerphone.
speakerphones
Enhanced secure
off-hook voice
This software enhancement makes
announcement (SOHVA) to a station that he or she is currently service observing.
possible for a station user to make a secure off-hook voice
Although
a
announce
operation
programmer can disable the SOHVA feature when necessary, every DigiTech telephone can
send and receive SOHVA calls as a system default, he or she must enable the service observe
feature before a user can make use of it.
Expanded personal
rlng tone
The system provides a group of distinctive tones for station ringing. A station user can choose a
tone from this group to provide a distinctive ring at his or her telephone. Often when several
telephones are located close to each other, each user chooses a different personal ring tone.
Previous software provided four different tone choices. This software enhancement increases the
distinctive ring choices to six. The personal ring tone choices now provided include the following
distinctive tones:
Hz
23 Hz warble
Hz 16 Hz warble
Hz 16 Hz warble
Hz 23 Hz warble
Hz 16 Hz warble
Hz
23 Hz warble
Simplified hybrid
operation
In the past, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has required that telephone system
manufacturers provide a hardware strap that installers could move to distinguish between hybrid
system and key system operation. The DigiTech system provided this strap at either the
station connector or at a special terminal strip (depending upon the system model). The installer
strapped two terminals together at either the
station connector block or at the special
terminal strip to select the hybrid mode. Recent rulings by the FCC have eliminated the need for
With this software release, whenever
system automatically assumes hybrid
company; therefore, the FCC still requires
programmer assigns lines
the hardware strap.
groups the
may still incur a higher monthly tariff to the
The hybrid system mode
that the installer report the equipment-type category designation number (KF for key system, MF
for hybrid system) to the telephone company at the time of installation.
Enhanced
call back
Prior to this software release, a station user could only camp on to a station that was busy on the
intercom line. With this software release 11 a, a user can also camp on to a station after calling
on the intercom line and receiving no answer.
Support for
telephones with
revlslon letter of I or
later
With the release of the revision I models, Comdial has enhanced the design of the DigiTech
telephones. These enhanced telephones require changes to the system software that this
release provides.
a
All revision I DigiTech Telephones provide red, orange, and green light emitting diodes
Red
indicate which lines are in use at another station. Green
indicate which lines are
in use or on hold at a station. An orange LED indicates a ringing line thus distinguishing between
lines that are on hold and a line that is ringing. Additionally, all revision I DigiTech telephones
provide pushbutton volume control on their front panels and a group listening feature.
group
listening, a user can
on the telephone speaker while the handset is off hook.
The
LCD speakerphone provides enhanced displays that prompt users on the
operation of the many system features available to them. The LCD speakerphone provides three
interactive buttons that provide quick easy access to system features and
button
programming without dialing codes. It also includes an auxiliary jack on the rear panel where the
installer or the user can connect devices such as headsets, tape recorders, external ringers and
external pagers.
continued on next page . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB09 1
FEATURE
Support for
telephones wlth a
revision letter of I or
later
BENEFIT
There are several items that the installer/programmer needs to consider when installing the
revision I and later DigiTech telephone to a DigiTech system. These items are detailed below.
While the DigiTech system with software release 11 a and later supports the use of all DigiTech
telephones regardless of their revision letter, any systems with a software release of 9 or earlier
In other words, whenvever a system includes
will not support the revision I and later telephones.
revision I or later telephones, be sure that the system software release is 11 a or later.
Always program station ports to provide ringing line preference to revision I and later
telephones that are connected there. This action is necessary before the orange LED feature can
become active.
The auxiliary jack will only serve the external device listed in the telephone display and will only
serve one of those devices at a time. The user must program a separate enable/disable button
for each external device that he or she plans to connect to the auxiliary jack. The installer must
provide external power for the auxiliary device if it requires power. The telephone does not
supply any power to the device through the auxiliary jack. The auxiliary jack is an source of audio
output from the telephone and is not designed to receive signals or power from an external device
Do not connect the output of an external device or the tip and ring leads of a
or a telephone line.
Do not connect any devices other than those mentioned in
telephone line to the auxiliary jack.
the telephone users guide to the auxiliary jack.
Support for
With this software release, the DigiTech digital telephone system provides support for the
proprietary single-line digital telephone (product code
automatically recognizes the 7701 telephone when the installer connects it to a station
This means that the system programmer does not have to take any special programming steps to
He or she can use any of the station programming
described in the system manual provided with the telephone system to adjust the parameters of
The system
proprietary
telephones
allow the
telephone to operate.
the station port as they are needed. Publication
Proprietary Single-Line Telephone
User’s Guide provides complete instructions for using the 7701
telephone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB091
FEATURE
for
voice
BENEFIT
With software release 1 la, the
ExecuMail voice processing system connected to the system’s station ports through the Comdial
ATI-D analog terminal interface. The ATI-D is a accessory for the digital
telephone system. It has dual circuits that allow the ExecuMail to interface to two station ports.
Refer to Comdial publication Instructions For The Analog Terminal
(AT/-D) for complete details for using the ATI-D to interface between the digital
digital telephone system supports the use of the
processing system
telephone system and the
system. In addition to the required programming task of
identifying the ExecuMail station ports as voice mail ports, there are several other programming
considerations associated
their options are wanted.
the ExecuMail operation that the programmer can make whenever
VOICE MAIL PORT (Required)
The programmer must identify the station ports where the installer has connected the ExecuMail
system. Identifying them as voice mail ports enables the digital telephone system to recognize
them as such for proper call handling. Use the following programming feature to enable the
station port for ExecuMail operation.
NOTE: The digital telephone system automatically disables this feature if an
installer replaces the
with a multiline telephone at the
programmed station port.
To program this feature, press
# 7 4 6
then do the following steps:
NOTE: The station that is being used for programming cannot be
programmed as a voice mail port.
1. Dial 63.
2. Dial 32.
“STATION
“VOICE
FEATURES”
PORT
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
station 1 1 57: Dial 11
4. Press SPKR to end.
67.
AUTOMATIC
(Optlon)
With the automatic attendant feature, the ExecuMail system automatically answers any line that is
ringing at a voice mail port. As a default, the system automatically enables ringing line
preference for any port the programmer identifies as voice mail ports. The programmer must
choose a ringing assignment for the lines assigned to the voice mail port before the ExecuMail
system can provide the automatic attendant feature.
To program this feature, press
# 7 4 6 *then do the following steps:
1. Dial 64.
2. Dial 1.
“DIRECT RING
3. Select line ports for direct ringing:
-140rpressAl
line port
line port 17
Dial
Dial 17
or press
24
24 ( or press HOLD then press Al
A8).
4. Dial # when all line ports are selected.
Continued on next page . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
TAB091
FEATURE
Support for
BENEFIT
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
station 1 57 dial 11 57.
6. Dial
7. Dial
processing system
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line ringing assignment
or press SPKR to end.
Delayed
1. Dial 54.
2. Dial 2.
“DELAY RING
3. Select line ports for delayed ringing:
line port l-14
line port
Dial 01
Dial
14 or press Al
or press
A14,
line port 17 24
Dial 17
24 (or press HOLD then press Al
A8).
4. Dial # when all line ports are selected.
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
station 1
57: Dial 11 57.
6. Dial
7. Dial
when all station ports are selected.
for next station/line ringing feature
or press SPKR to end.
Night Transfer (of
1. Dial 54.
2. Dial 3.
“NIGHT RING”
3. Select line ports:
line port l-14
line
Dial 01
Dial
14 or press Al A14,
or press
line port 17
24
Dial 17
24 (or press HOLD then press Al
A8).
4. Dial # when all line ports are selected.
5. Select station ports to be programmed:
station 11
57: Dial 11
when all station
for next station/line ringing feature
6. Dial
7. Dial
are selected.
or press SPKR to end.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OF VOICE MAIL (Option)
The programmer can choose the immediate transfer mode for voice mail transfers.
However,
he turns on the screen confirm options provided by the system, he must not
choose the immediate transfer mode because it allows the system to transfer a call as soon as it
answers precluding any screen and confirm action that the ExecuMail can provide.
To program this feature, press
1. Dial 25
# 7 4 6
then do the following steps:
MAIL AUTO
2. Press Al to toggle between enable and disable (LED On
Enable)
or dial 1
(Al LED on) and dial 2 to disable.
3. Press SPKR to end.
Continued on next page . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
TAB091
BENEFIT
FEATURE
for
HUNT GROUPS (Option)
voice
processing system
When a station port that has been assigned to a hunt group is busy, a call to
idle station port in the group. A call will try to ring every port in a hunt group and if all are busy,
A programmer can assign all
will ring at the next
the telephone system will return a busy tone to the caller.
ExecuMail ports to a circular hunt group to take advantage of its multiple-port interface capability.
Make a circular hunt group by linking all ExecuMail ports to one another and then linking the last
ExecuMail port in the hunt group with the first ExecuMail port in the group.
ExecuMail connected at station ports and 016, place
For example, with the
013 in a hunt group and
link 014 to it, then place 014 in a hunt group and link 015 to it, then place 015 in a hunt group and
link 016 to it, and finially place 016 in a hunt group and link 013 to it to complete the circle.
this arrangement, a call will first try to ring at port 013, then try port 014 and so forth until it trys all
four ports.
To program this feature, press
# 7 4 6
then do the following steps:
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 18.
“STATION
FEATURES”
HUNT LINK”
3. Select first linking station:
station 11 57: Dial 11 57.
3. Select second linking station:
station 11 57: Dial 11 57.
4. Dial
for another link or press SPKR to end.
VOICE MAIL LINE ID (Optlon)
The programmer can program the ExecuMail lines with identification (ID) numbers that allow the
ExecuMail system to identify which line it is answering. The ID numbers that the programmer
assigns here must match the ID numbers that are selected as part of ExecuMail system
programming.
To program this feature, press
7 4 6
LN ID”
then do the following steps:
1. Dial 43.
“VOICE
2. Select line port:
line port 1-14
line port
Dial 01 14 or Press Al A14,
Dial or press
Dial 17 24 (or press HOLD then press Al A8).
line port 17-24
3. Dial #to clear current ID.
4. Dial ID number (6 digit maximum).
5. Press SPKR to end.
VOICE MAIL TRANSFER ON BUSY (Optlon)
The programmer can arrange the system to alert a busy telephone that the ExecuMail system is
attempting to transfer a call to it instead of having it automatically route the call to a voice mail
box. He or she can use this programming feature to program a station (usually the attendant
station) for this option.
To program this feature, press
# 7 4 6
then do the following steps:
“STATION FEATURES!
XFR ON
1. Dial 53.
2. Dial 31.
3. Select station ports to be programmed:
station 11 57: Dial 11 57.
4. Press SPKR to end.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB091
STATION 10 PROGRAMMING OVERLAY
. Cut out along border.
l
Cut out shaded openings.
Fit over station faceplate.
l
Al
A2
A3
A4
A0
A9
A10
Al
I OR HIGHER1
PROGRAMMING
A5
.
OVERLAY
HOLD
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Made
in the USA
TECHNICAL ADVISORY BULLETIN
Date:
TAB080
SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS FOR
THE DigiTech DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM
This bulletin discusses the following software enhancement and programming clarification for the DigiTech digital
telephone system:
l
l
Support for dual 32-button consoles
Button mapping a DigiTech
LCD speakerphone
Availability of this enhancement is as follows:
SYSTEM
C O 4 0 8
BASE UNIT PRODUCT CODE
GO408 All Revisions
GO81 6 All Revisions
SOFTWARE CARTRIDGE PRODUCT CODE
SO408 Rev. 9 and later
SO81 6 Rev. 9 and later
S1632 Rev. 9 and later
C O 8 1
6
Cl 632
G1632 All Revisions
FEATURE AND BENEFIT
The major feature and benefit of the revision 9 software enhancement is per the following discussion.
FEATURE
BENEFIT
Dual Console
Feature
The dual console feature allow users of
(product code assigned to one telephone. This feature is especially useful when used
telephone systems to have two
consoles
with a DigiTech Cl632 system that has one or two CM408 expansion modules included with it. The
dual console feature allows a station user to monitor up to 48 stations from one station location.
The first
console automatically complements the telephone at the port that is logic-paired
Install the second console at any station port and,
with the port that the console occupies.
using COS programming, assign it as a second console to the same station port that is paired with
the first console. The dual console should not be placed at station ports 10 or 11.
DigiTech station ports are logic-paired asfollows:
42-43
44-45
46-47
48-49
SO-51
52 53
54 55
56-57
10-11
26-27
28 29
30-31
32-33
34-35
36-37
38-39
-40 -41
Station ports are as follows:
Potts 10 through 17 on
14-15
16-17
18 19
20-21
22 23
24-25
$-station base unit
base unit
32-station base unit
base unit
Potts
Ports
through 25 on
through 47 on
Ports 42 through 57 on
with two
g-station expansion modules
Continued on next page. . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB080
DigiTech Software Enhancement
BENEFIT
FEATURE
The first console (the one installed at the logic-paired port) extends the
buttons of the paired
telephone by 32 and provides DSS/BLF coverage for station ports 10 through 41. Additionally, the
Console
Feature
Refer to the
first console provides COS programmlng buttons Cl0 through
when needed.
programming overlay that is included at the end of this publication.
The second console (the one installed at the programmed station port) provides
as follows:
coverage
l
On a Cl 632 with two CM408 expansion modules, the first 16 buttons are automatically assigned
(defautted) to station ports 42 through 57.
l
On a Cl 632 with one CM408 expansion module, the first 8 buttons are automatically assigned
(defaulted) to station ports 42 through 49.
l
l
On any other smaller station capacity system, all buttons are unassigned.
All 32 buttons on the second console are programmable for DSS and/or
use.
The second console provides COS programming buttons C42 through
Refer to the programming overlay that is included at the end of this publication.
when needed.
It is important to remember that when a second-console assignment is made or cleared, the console
button mapping and values are reset to match the default values, or any previously
programmed ones, for the active feature. This means that when the second-console feature is
cleared, the console installed at that port complements the telephone that is installed at the
logic-paired port instead of the one at the port set with the second-console programming. The
console buttons are reassigned (defaulted) to stations 10 through 41 or to the maximum
station number on system. Figure 1 typical dual console configuration.
A second console can be installed and programmed without
having a first console installed at a logic-paired port. The
c
button assignment is automatically defautted for
second console but can be reprogrammed as
required. This configuration is convenient
for adding a console to an existing tele-
phone installation that already has
a
the logic-paired
occupied.
Do not use this configuration
for station ports 10 and 12
because the console buttons
will not be usable for
programming.
Telephone
Figure 1. Dual Console Wiring
Continued on next page. . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software Enhancement
TAB080
FEATURE
BENEFIT
Dual
STATION 10 PROGRAMMING
Console
Feature
continued
To program a station port for the second-console feature,
Press
and dial
# 7 4 6
MODE
Dial 53 for station features.
STATION FEATURES
SECOND CONSOLE
2.
3. Dial 34 for second console.
4. Assign console to station.
Type console port number then type station port number that console
is to be assigned to.
5. Press SPKR (MNTR) to end.
To clear a second-console feature assignment,
1. Repeat steps 1 through 3 above.
2. Type console port number twice.
3. Press SPKR (MNTR) to end.
VDT PROGRAMMING
To program
1. Type I
a
station port for the second-console feature,
7 4 6 and press RETURN
2. Type 3, RETURN for Station COS.
3. Type 10, RETURN for
Miscellaneous Feature Programming.
4. Type 20, RETURN for Assign Second DSS Console to a Station.
5. Type 1, RETURN to assign second DSS console to a station.
6. Type console
number.
7. Type station port number of assigned station.
To clear a second-console feature,
1. Repeat steps 1 through 5 above.
2. Type 0, RETURN to clear previous assignment.
3. Type console port number.
PROGRAMMING CLARIFICATION
The programming clarification is per the following discussion.
CLARIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
Button Mapping
With
When programming the button mapping on a
speakerphone as the programming station, press buttons Al
buttons on the telephone being mapped. Because the DigiTech
DigiTech telephone using a DigiTech
LCD
to select those same
LCD speakerphone does
on the telephone being
Al4 and
LCD
Speakerphones
not provide buttons B4 through B8, dial 103
mapped.
107 to select buttons B4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAB080
Software Enhancement
STATION 10 PROGRAMMING OVERLAY
l
Cut out along border.
‘it over station faceplate.
PROGRAMMING OVERLAY,
I
’ C25
C24
C57
I c53
C25
,
t
I
C24
I
C38
C23 C39
C38
c37
C37
C36
C36 I
I
I
c35
c35
Cl9
I
C l 8
I
I
c33
Cl6
C32
i Cl6 C32 I
i
c31
I
I
I
i
c29
c29
I
I
Cl2 C28
C28
Cl1
I
I
I
I
C26
Cl0 C26
t
PAIRED-PORT
PROGRAMMED
DUAL
CONSOLE (SPARE)
CONS OLE
CONSOLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|